Document Lewiston_doc_4a614ba8a5

Lewiston City Hall Social Services Suite Renovations Lewiston, Maine Project No. 12537 August 1, 2012 Bid No. 2012-042 Issued for Bid Auburn Business Park, 46 Harriman Drive, Auburn, Maine 04210 [PHONE REDACTED] www.harriman.com © 2012 Harriman ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\_03tofc-12537.doc LEWISTON CITY HALL SOCIAL SERVICES SUITE RENOVATION LEWISTON, ME TABLE OF CONTENTS 001116 – Invitation to Bid 002113 – Instructions to Bidders 002213 – Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 002513 – Prebid Meetings 002600 – Procurement Substitution 003126 – Existing Hazardous Material Information 003143 – Permit Application 004126 – Bid Form – Single Prime Contract 004313 – Bid Security Forms 004373 – Proposed Schedule of Values Form 006000 – Forms A101 – 2007 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor A201 – 2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction A701 – 1997 Instructions to Bidders G701 – 2001 Change Order G702 – 1992 Application and Certificate for Payment G703 – 1992 Continuation Sheet G704 – 2000 Certificate of Substantial Completion G707 – 1994 Consent of Surety to Final Payment G710 – 1992 Architect’s Supplemental Instructions G714 – Construction Change Directive DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 – Summary 012500 – Substitution Procedures 012600 – Contract Modification Procedures 012900 – Payment Procedures 013100 – Project Management and Coordination 013200 – Construction Progress Documentation 013233 – Photographic Documentation 013300 – Submittal Procedures 014000 – Quality Requirements 014200 – References 015000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls 015639 – Temporary Tree and Plant Protection 016000 – Product Requirements 017300 – Execution Requirements 017700 – Closeout Procedures 017823 – Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 – Project Record Documents ---PAGE BREAK--- TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\_03tofc-12537.doc DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 - Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE Not Used DIVISION 04 - MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 05 - METALS Not Used Division 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061000 - Rough Carpentry 062023 - Interior Finish Carpentry 064000 - Architectural Woodwork 064600 - Wood Trim DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Not Used DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081416 - Flush Wood Doors 081433 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors 087100 - Door Hardware 088000 - Glazing DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 - Non-structural Metal Framing 092900 - Gypsum Board 095123 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings 096513 - Resilient Base and Accessories 096519 - Resilient Tile Flooring 096813 - Tile Carpeting 099123 - Interior Painting 099300 - Staining and Transparent Finishing DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 104413 - Fire Protection Cabinets 104416 - Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Not Used ---PAGE BREAK--- TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\_03tofc-12537.doc DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122113 - Horizontal Louver Blinds DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Not Used DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260100 - Basic Electrical Requirements 260111 - Conduit 260112 - Surface Raceways 260114 - Cable Trays 260123 - Wire and Cable 260130 - Boxes 260141 - Wiring Devices 260170 - Grounding and Bonding 260180 - Equipment Wiring 260195 - Electrical Identification 260510 - Luminaires LIST OF DRAWINGS - COVER ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS A00.1 ARCHITECTURAL LEGENDS AND ABBREVIATIONS A05.1 DEMOLITION PLAN A10.1 FLOOR PLAN A60.1 SCHEDULES AND DETAILS A61.1 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE AND DETAILS A70.1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A72.1 FURNITURE PLAN A81.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS E00.1 LEGEND & SCHEDULES E05.1 LIGHTING EXISTING CONDITIONS FLOOR PLAN E05.2 POWER EXISTING CONDITIONS FLOOR PLAN E10.1 LIGHTING FLOOR PLAN E20.1 POWER FLOOR PLAN ---PAGE BREAK--- INVITATION TO BID 001116 - 1 DOCUMENT 001116 - INVITATION TO BID 1.1 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Notice to Bidders: Prequalified bidders are invited to submit bids for Project as described in this Document according to the Instructions to Bidders. B. Project Identification: Lewiston City Hall Social Services Suite Renovation 1. Project Location: Lewiston City Hall, 27 Pine Street, Lewiston, ME 04240 C. Owner: City of Lewiston 1. Owner's Representative: Mike Paradis, Director of City Buildings D. Architect: Richard Borrelli, AIA, NCARB E. Project Description: Renovation of existing space for re-use as Social Services Suite. F. Construction Contract: Bids will be received for the following Work: 1. General Contract (all trades) 1.2 BID SUBMITTAL AND OPENING A. Owner will receive sealed bids until the bid time and date at the location indicated below. Owner will consider bids prepared in compliance with the Instructions to Bidders issued by Owner, and delivered as follows: 1. Received by the City of Lewiston, Maine 2. Bid Date: August 14, 2012. 3. Bid Time: 2:00 p.m. local time. 4. Location: Lewiston City Hall, 27 Pine Street, Lewiston, ME 04240, office of the Director of Budget/Purchasing B. Bids will be thereafter opened in the presence of the bidders and read aloud. 1.3 BID SECURITY A. Bid security shall be submitted with each bid in the amount of 10 percent of the bid amount. No bids may be withdrawn for a period of 60 days after opening of bids. Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive informalities and irregularities. 1.4 PRE-BID CONFERENCE A. A pre-bid conference for all bidders will be held at the project site on August 7, 2012 at 10:00 a.m., local time. Prospective general bidders are required to attend. General bidders may request subcontractors attend. 1.5 DOCUMENTS A. Electronic Procurement and Contracting Documents: Obtain electronic access after July 31, 2012 by going to the City Website at: www.lewistonmaine.gov under Purchasing and “Bid and Awards”. Contract documents can also be viewed at the following locations: ---PAGE BREAK--- INVITATION TO BID 001116 - 2 1. Office of Director of Budget/Purchasing, City Hall – Tel. [PHONE REDACTED] ext. 3259 2. Office of Director of Public Buildings, 103 Adams Ave. – Tel. [PHONE REDACTED] ext. 3412 3. McGraw Hill, Scarborough, Maine 4. Willis of Northern New England, Auburn, Maine 5. Construction Summary of Maine, Manchester, NH 6. Associated Constructors of Maine, Augusta, Maine 1.6 BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Bidders must be properly licensed under the laws governing their respective trades and be able to obtain insurance and bonds required for the Work. A Performance Bond, a separate Labor and Material Payment Bond, and Insurance in a form acceptable to Owner will be required of the successful Bidder. END OF DOCUMENT 001116 ---PAGE BREAK--- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 002113 - 1 DOCUMENT 002113 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. AIA Document A701, "Instructions to Bidders," is hereby incorporated into the Procurement and Contracting Requirements by reference. 1. A copy of AIA Document A701, "Instructions to Bidders," is bound in this Project Manual. END OF DOCUMENT 002113 ---PAGE BREAK--- SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 002213 - 1 DOCUMENT 002213 - SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. Instructions to Bidders for Project consist of the following: 1. AIA Document A701, "Instructions to Bidders." a copy of which is bound in this Project Manual. 2. The following Supplementary Instructions to Bidders that modify and add to the requirements of the Instructions to Bidders. 1.2 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, GENERAL A. The following supplements modify AIA Document A701, "Instructions to Bidders." Where a portion of the Instructions to Bidders is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, unaltered portions of the Instructions to Bidders shall remain in effect. 1.3 ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS A. Add Section 2.1.3.1: 1. 2.1.3.1 - The Bidder has investigated all required fees, permits, and regulatory requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and has properly included in the submitted bid the cost of such fees, permits, and requirements not otherwise indicated as provided by Owner. B. Add Section 2.1.6: 1. 2.1.6 - The Bidder has incorporated into the Bid adequate sums for work performed by installers whose qualifications meet those indicated in the Procurement and Contracting Documents. 1.4 ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. 3.4 - Addenda: 1. Delete Section 3.4.3 and replace with the following: a. 3.4.3 - Addenda may be issued at any time prior to the receipt of bids. 2. Add Section 3.4.4.1: a. 3.4.4.1 - Owner may elect to waive the requirement for acknowledging receipt of 3.4.4 Addenda as follows: ---PAGE BREAK--- SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 002213 - 2 1) 3.4.4.1.1 - Information received as part of the Bid indicates that the Bid, as submitted, reflects modifications to the Procurement and Contracting Documents included in an unacknowledged Addendum. 2) 3.4.4.1.2 - Modifications to the Procurement and Contracting Documents in an unacknowledged Addendum do not, in the opinion of Owner, affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 1.5 ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURES A. 4.1 - Preparation of Bids: 1. Add Section 4.1.1.1: a. 4.1.1.1 - Printable electronic Bid Forms and related documents are available from Architect. 2. Add Section 4.1.8: a. 4.1.8 - The Bid shall include unit prices when called for by the Procurement and Contracting Documents. Owner may elect to consider unit prices in the determination of award. Unit prices will be incorporated into the Contract. 3. Add Section 4.1.9: a. 4.1.9 - Owner may elect to disqualify a bid due to failure to submit a bid in the form requested, failure to bid requested alternates or unit prices, failure to complete entries in all blanks in the Bid Form, or inclusion by the Bidder of any alternates, conditions, limitations or provisions not called for. 4. Add Section 4.1.10: a. 4.1.10 - Bids shall include sales and use taxes. Contractors shall show separately with each payment application the sales and use taxes paid by them and their subcontractors in the form indicated. Reimbursement of sales and use taxes, if any, shall be applied for by Owner for the sole benefit of Owner. Exempt # E45975 B. 4.3 - Submission of Bids: 1. Add Section 4.3.1.2: a. 4.3.1.2 - Include Bidder's Contractor License Number applicable in Project jurisdiction on the face of the sealed bid envelope. C. 4.4 - Modification or Withdrawal of Bids: 1. Add the following sections to 4.4.2: a. 4.4.2.1 - Such modifications to or withdrawal of a bid may only be made by persons authorized to act on behalf of the Bidder. Authorized persons are those so ---PAGE BREAK--- SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 002213 - 3 identified in the Bidder's corporate bylaws, specifically empowered by the Bidder's charter or similar legally binding document acceptable to Owner, or by a power of attorney, signed and dated, describing the scope and limitations of the power of attorney. Make such documentation available to Owner at the time of seeking modifications or withdrawal of the Bid. b. 4.4.2.2 - Owner will consider modifications to a bid written on the sealed bid envelope by authorized persons when such modifications comply with the following: the modification is indicated by a percent or stated amount to be added to or deducted from the Bid; the amount of the Bid itself is not made known by the modification; a signature of the authorized person, along with the time and date of the modification, accompanies the modification. Completion of an unsealed bid form, awaiting final figures from the Bidder, does not require power of attorney due to the evidenced authorization of the Bidder implied by the circumstance of the completion and delivery of the Bid. D. 4.5 - Break-Out Pricing Bid Supplement: 1. Add Section 4.5: a. 4.5 - Provide detailed cost breakdowns on forms provided no later than two business days following Architect's request. E. 4.6 - Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers List Bid Supplement: 1. Add Section 4.6: a. 4.6 - Provide list of major subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers furnishing or installing products no later than 5business days following Architect's request. Include those subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers providing work totaling 3 percent or more of the Bid amount. Do not change subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers from those submitted without approval of Architect. 1.6 ARTICLE 5 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS A. 5.2 - Rejection of Bids: 1. Add Section 5.2.1: a. 5.2.1 - Owner reserves the right to reject a bid based on Owner's and Architect's evaluation of qualification information submitted following opening of bids. Owner's evaluation of the Bidder's qualifications will include: status of licensure and record of compliance with licensing requirements, record of quality of completed work, record of Project completion and ability to complete, record of financial management including financial resources available to complete Project and record of timely payment of obligations, record of Project site management including compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, record of and number of current claims and disputes and the status of their resolution, and qualifications of the Bidder's proposed Project staff and proposed subcontractors. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 002213 - 4 1.7 ARTICLE 6 - POSTBID INFORMATION A. 6.1 - Contractor's Qualification Statement: 1. Add Section 6.1.1: a. 6.1.1 - Submit Contractor's Qualification Statement no later than 5 business days following Architect's request. B. 6.3 - Submittals: 1. Add Section 6.3.1.4: a. 6.3.1.4 - Submit information requested in Sections 6.3.1.1, 6.3.1.2, and 6.3.1.3 no later than 5 business days following Architect's request. 1.8 ARTICLE 7 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND A. 7.1 - Bond Requirements: 1. Add Section 7.1.1.1: a. 7.1.1.1 - Both a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond will be required, each in an amount equal to 100 percent of the Contract Sum. B. 7.2 - Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds: 1. Delete the first sentence of Section 7.2.1 and insert the following: a. The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to Owner no later than 10 days after the date of Notice of Intent to Award and no later than the date of execution of the Contract, whichever occurs first. Owner may deem the failure of the Bidder to deliver required bonds within the period of time allowed a default. 2. Delete Section 7.2.3 and insert the following: a. 7.2.3 - Bonds shall be executed and be in force on the date of the execution of the Contract. 1.9 ARTICLE 9 - EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT A. Add Article 9: 1. 9.1.1 - Subsequent to the Notice of Intent to Award, and within 10 days after the prescribed Form of Agreement is presented to the Awardee for signature, the Awardee shall execute and deliver the Agreement to Owner through Architect, in such number of counterparts as Owner may require. 2. 9.1.2 - Owner may deem as a default the failure of the Awardee to execute the Contract and to supply the required bonds when the Agreement is presented for signature within the period of time allowed. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 002213 - 5 3. 9.1.3 - Unless otherwise indicated in the Procurement and Contracting Documents or the executed Agreement, the date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of the executed Agreement. 4. 9.1.4 - In the event of a default, Owner may declare the amount of the Bid security forfeited and elect to either award the Contract to the next responsible bidder or re- advertise for bids. 2.0 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. Instructions to Bidders for Project consist of the following: 1. AIA Document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction” a copy of which is bound in this Project Manual. 2. The following Supplementary Instructions to Bidders that modify and add to the requirements of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 2.1 ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS B. Modify Section 11.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance: 1. The Contractor shall take all responsibility of the work and take all precautions for preventing injuries to persons and property in or about the work; shall bear all losses resulting to him/her on account of the amount or character of the work or because the nature of the land in or on which the work is done is different from what was estimated or expected or on account of the weather, elements or other cause; and he/she shall assume the defense of and indemnify and save harmless the City and its officers, agents and servants from all claims relating to labor and materials furnished for the work; to inventions, patents and patent rights used in doing the work; to injuries to any person or corporation received or sustained by or from the Contractor and his/her employees in doing the work, or in consequence of any improper materials, implements or labor used therein; and to any act, omission or neglect of the Contractor and his/her employees therein. 2. The Contractor shall furnish proof of coverage with adequate insurance of the types and to the limits specified below naming the City of Lewiston as additional insured. Certificate of such insurance shall be filed with the Director of Budget/Purchasing for his/her approval before permission to commence work will be granted. 3. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS a. Claims: The City of Lewiston will not be held responsible for any damages or injuries arising out of any snow removal activity for the City. Any related claim will be referred to the Contractor. The contractor may wish to make personal restoration within a reasonable amount of time at the property owner’s satisfaction or process a claim with their insurance carrier. b. Insurance: The Contractor shall furnish proof of coverage with adequate insurance of the types and to the limits specified below naming the City of Lewiston as additional insured. c. Workers’ Compensation: Workers’ Compensation, coverage with Statutory Limits and Employers Liability for all employees with limits of $400,000 per incident; and in case any work is sublet, the Contractor shall require the sub-contractor similarly to provide coverage for the latter’s employees unless such employees are covered by the protection afforded the Contractor. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 002213 - 6 d. Automotive Liability Insurance: Automotive Liability insurance with minimum limits of liability for bodily injury in the amount of $400,000 for each occurrence and minimum limits of liability for property damage in the amount of $50,000/$100,000 aggregate. e. General Liability Insurance: General Liability insurance with minimum limits of liability for bodily injury in the amount of five hundred thousand ($500,000) for each occurrence and minimum limits of liability for property damage in the amount of $50,000/$100,000 aggregate, or a combined single limit of five hundred thousand ($500,000) for each occurrence, including completed operations shall be required. f. Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond in the sum of the total amount of the Contractor’s proposal with a surety company satisfactory to the Owner will be required as surety for the faithful performance of the Contract by the successful bidder. The bonds will be required prior to execution of the Contract. C. Modify Section 15 Claims and Disputes: 1. DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS AND EXPENSES: a. In the event of any dispute between or involving the City of Lewiston and Contractor, whether resolved by arbitration, litigation or some other mechanism of dispute resolution, in the event that the City shall be a prevailing party, Contractor shall reimburse the City for its attorney’s fee and costs reasonably incurred in connection with the resolution of the dispute. END OF DOCUMENT 002213 ---PAGE BREAK--- PREBID MEETINGS 002513 - 1 DOCUMENT 002513 - PREBID MEETINGS 1.1 PREBID MEETING A. Architect will conduct a Pre-bid meeting as indicated below: 1. Meeting Date: August 7th, 2012 2. Meeting Time: 10:00 a.m., local time. 3. Location: Project Site B. Attendance: 1. Prime Bidders: Attendance at Pre-bid meeting is mandatory. 2. Subcontractors: Attendance at Pre-bid meeting is encouraged. C. Bidder Questions: Submit written questions to be addressed at Pre-bid meeting minimum of two business days prior to meeting. D. Agenda: Pre-bid meeting agenda will include review of topics that may affect proper preparation and submittal of bids, including the following: 1. Procurement and Contracting Requirements: a. Instructions to Bidders. b. Bid Form and Attachments. c. Bid Submittal Requirements. d. Bid Submittal Checklist. e. Notice of Award. 2. Communication during Bidding Period: a. Obtaining documents. b. Access to Project Web site. c. Bidder's Requests for Information. d. Bidder's Substitution Request/Prior Approval Request. e. Addenda. 3. Contracting Requirements: a. Agreement. b. The General Conditions. c. The Supplementary Conditions. d. Other Owner requirements. 4. Construction Documents: a. Scopes of Work. b. Temporary Facilities. c. Use of Site. ---PAGE BREAK--- PREBID MEETINGS 002513 - 2 d. Work Restrictions. e. Substitutions following award. 5. Schedule: a. Project Schedule. b. Contract Time. c. Liquidated Damages. d. Other Bidder Questions. 6. Site/facility visit or 7. Post-Meeting Addendum. E. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes to attendees. Minutes of meeting are issued as Available Information and do not constitute a modification to the Procurement and Contracting Documents. Modifications to the Procurement and Contracting Documents are issued by written Addendum only. 1. Sign-in Sheet: Minutes will include list of meeting attendees. END OF DOCUMENT 002513 ---PAGE BREAK--- PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION 002600 - 1 DOCUMENT 002600 - PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Procurement Substitution Requests: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those indicated in the Procurement and Contracting Documents, submitted prior to receipt of bids. B. Substitution Requests: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those indicated in the Contract Documents, submitted following Contract award. See Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for conditions under which Substitution requests will be considered following Contract award. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.3 PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Procurement Substitutions, General: By submitting a bid, the Bidder represents that its bid is based on materials and equipment described in the Procurement and Contracting Documents, including Addenda. Bidders are encouraged to request approval of qualifying substitute materials and equipment when the Specifications Sections list materials and equipment by product or manufacturer name. B. Procurement Substitution Requests will be received and considered by Owner when the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action: 1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents, including the level of quality of the Work represented by the requirements therein. 3. The request is fully documented and properly submitted. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Procurement Substitution Request: Submit to Architect Procurement Substitution Request must be made in writing by prime contract Bidder only in compliance with the following requirements: 1. Requests for substitution of materials and equipment will be considered if received no later than 4 days prior to date and time of bid opening. 2. Submittal Format: Submit three copies of each written Procurement Substitution Request, using form bound in Project Manual. Submittal Format: a. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specifications Sections and drawing numbers. ---PAGE BREAK--- PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION 002600 - 2 b. Provide complete documentation on both the product specified and the proposed substitute, including the following information as appropriate: 1) Point-by-point comparison of specified and proposed substitute product data, fabrication drawings, and installation procedures. 2) Copies of current, independent third-party test data of salient product or system characteristics. 3) Samples where applicable or when requested by Architect. 4) Detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitute with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. 5) Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. 6) Research reports, where applicable, evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. 7) Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, which will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitute. c. Provide certification by manufacturer that the substitute proposed is equal to or superior to that required by the Procurement and Contracting Documents, and that its in-place performance will be equal to or superior to the product or equipment specified in the application indicated. d. Bidder, in submitting the Procurement Substitution Request, waives the right to additional payment or an extension of Contract Time because of the failure of the substitute to perform as represented in the Procurement Substitution Request. B. Architect's Action: 1. Architect may request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the Procurement Substitution Request. Architect will notify all bidders of acceptance of the proposed substitute by means of an Addendum to the Procurement and Contracting Documents. C. Architect's approval of a substitute during bidding does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility to submit required shop drawings and to comply with all other requirements of the Contract Documents. END OF DOCUMENT 002600 ---PAGE BREAK--- EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION 003126 - 1 DOCUMENT 003126 - EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION 1.1 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents. B. Existing hazardous material reports are not available by the Owner. Hazardous materials including but not limited to asbestos, lead paint, PCB’s Biphenyl), and mold are likely to be encountered in this project. Testing and verification of said materials is included in the scope of this project. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 002113 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for examination of Project site and existing conditions. 2. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for notification requirements if materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered. END OF DOCUMENT 003126 ---PAGE BREAK--- PERMIT APPLICATION 003143 - 1 DOCUMENT 003143 - PERMIT APPLICATION 1.1 PERMIT APPLICATION INFORMATION A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of the Bidders' own investigations. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents. B. Permit Application: Complete building permit application and file with authorities having jurisdiction within five days of the date of execution of the Contract. END OF DOCUMENT 003143 ---PAGE BREAK--- BID FORM – SINGLE PRIME CONTRACT 004126 - 1 DOCUMENT 004126 - BID FORM – SINGLE PRIME CONTRACT 1.1 BID INFORMATION A. Bidder: B. Project Name: City of Lewiston, Lewiston City Hall, Social Services Suite Renovation C. Project Location: 27 Pine Street, Lewiston, Maine, 04240. D. Owner: City of Lewiston E. Architect: Harriman F. Architect Project Number: 12537 1.2 CERTIFICATIONS AND BASE BID A. Contract for City of Lewiston, Lewiston City Hall Social Services Suite Renovation: The undersigned Bidder, having carefully examined the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Drawings, Specifications, and all subsequent Addenda, as prepared by Harriman, having visited the site, and being familiar with all conditions and requirements of the Work, hereby agrees to furnish all material, labor, equipment and services, necessary to complete the construction for above-named Project, according to the requirements of the Procurement and Contracting Documents, for the stipulated sum of: 1. Dollars 1.3 BID GUARANTEE A. The undersigned Bidder agrees to execute a contract for this Work in the above amount and to furnish surety as specified within 10 days after a written Notice of Award, if offered within 60 days after receipt of bids, and on failure to do so agrees to forfeit to Owner the attached cash, cashier's check, certified check, U.S. money order, or bid bond, as liquidated damages for such failure, in the following amount constituting five percent (10%) of the Base Bid amount above: 1. Dollars B. In the event Owner does not offer a Notice of Award within the time limits stated above, Owner will return to the undersigned the cash, cashier's check, certified check, U.S. money order, or bid bond. 1.4 TIME OF COMPLETION A. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees hereby to commence the Work of the Contract Documents on a date specified in a written Notice to Proceed to be issued by Architect, and shall fully complete the Work within 45 calendar days. ---PAGE BREAK--- BID FORM – SINGLE PRIME CONTRACT 004126 - 2 1.5 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA A. The undersigned Bidder acknowledges receipt of and use of the following Addenda in the preparation of this Bid: 1. Addendum No. 1, dated 1.6 SUBMISSION OF BID A. Respectfully submitted this of 2012. Submitted By: (Name of bidding firm or corporation) Authorized Signature: (Handwritten signature) Signed By: (Type or print name) Title: (Owner/Partner/President/Vice President) Witnessed By: (Handwritten signature) Attest: (Handwritten signature) By: (Type or print name) Title: (Corporate Secretary or Assistant Secretary) Street Address: City, State, Zip: Phone: License No.: Federal ID No.: (Affix Corporate Seal Here) END OF DOCUMENT 004126 ---PAGE BREAK--- BID SECURITY FORMS 004313 - 1 DOCUMENT 004313 - BID SECURITY FORMS 1.1 BID FORM SUPPLEMENT A. A completed bid bond form is required to be attached to the Bid Form. 1.2 BID BOND FORM A. AIA Document A310, "Bid Bond," is the recommended form for a bid bond. A bid bond acceptable to Owner, or other bid security as described in the Instructions to Bidders, is required to be attached to the Bid Form as a supplement. B. Copies of AIA standard forms may be obtained from The American Institute of Architects; www.aia.org/contractdocs/purchase/index.htm; email: [EMAIL REDACTED]; (800) 942- 7732. END OF DOCUMENT 004313 ---PAGE BREAK--- PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM 004373 - 1 DOCUMENT 004373 - PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM 1.1 BID FORM SUPPLEMENT A. A completed Proposed Schedule of Values form is required to be attached to the Bid Form. 1.2 PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM A. Proposed Schedule of Values Form: Provide a breakdown of the bid amount, including alternates, in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of bid. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal material and subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. B. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703 attached within this project manual. END OF DOCUMENT 004373 ---PAGE BREAK--- FORMS 006000 - 1 DOCUMENT 006000 – FORMS 1.1 FORM OF AGREEMENT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS A. The following form of Owner/Contractor Agreement and form of the General Conditions shall be used for Project: 1. AIA Document A101, "Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Stipulated Sum." a. The General Conditions for Project are AIA Document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction." 2. The General Conditions are included in the Project Manual. 3. The Supplementary Conditions for Project are incorporated into a modified copy of the General Conditions included in the Project Manual Retain subparagraph below when using custom Owner agreement. 4. Owner's document(s) bound following this Document. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE FORMS A. Administrative Forms: Additional administrative forms are specified in Division 01 General Requirements. B. Information and Modification Forms: 1. Change Order Form: AIA Document G701, "Change Order." 2. Form of Architect's Memorandum for Minor Changes in the Work: AIA Document G707, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 3. Form of Change Directive: AIA Document G714, "Construction Change Directive." C. Payment Forms: 1. Schedule of Values Form: AIA Document G703, "Continuation Sheet." 2. Payment Application: AIA Document G702/703, "Application and Certificate for Payment and Continuation Sheet." 3. Form of Consent of Surety: AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." END OF DOCUMENT 006000 ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- SUMMARY 011000 - 1 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Access to site. 4. Coordination with occupants. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification and drawing conventions. 7. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: City of Lewiston, Lewiston City Hall Social Services Suite Renovation 1. Project Location: 27 Pine Street, Lewiston, Maine, 04240. B. Owner: City of Lewiston 1. Owner's Representative: Mike Paradis, Director of City Buildings. C. Architect: Harriman, Architects and Engineers, 46 Harriman Drive Auburn, ME 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Renovation of existing interior office suite including gypsum board over existing wall surfaces, painting of walls and trim, incorporation of systems furniture, installation of new electrical work including new lighting in select spaces, interior trim and finish, final cleaning and project close out. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUMMARY 011000 - 2 B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have partial access of the existing building site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited to the areas directly adjacent the Social Services Suite on the Second Floor. B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas required for renovation processes. 2. Limits: Limit site disturbance, including existing vegetation, plants and trees, to 40 feet (12.2 m) beyond building perimeter; 10 feet (3 m) beyond surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utilities less than 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter; 15 feet (4.5 m) beyond primary roadway curbs; and 25 feet (7.6 m) beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces (such as pervious paving areas, storm-water detention facilities) that require additional staging areas in order to limit compaction in the constructed area. 3. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. D. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weather-tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner-utilized file cabinets will need to occupy the premises during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUMMARY 011000 - 3 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Weekend Hours: 8:00 a.m. to 3:00 p.m. If required, contact Owner 2. Early Morning Hours: If required, contact Owner. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: If required, contact Owner and notify Architect. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than four days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Architect's and Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than four days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Architect's and Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. F. Controlled Substances: Use of controlled substances within the existing building and on Project site is not permitted. G. Employee Identification: Not required. 1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUMMARY 011000 - 4 B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile or electronic portable document file (pdf) of form provided in Project Manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2 c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fifteen days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than fifteen days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 ---PAGE BREAK--- CONTRACT MODIFICATION 012600 - 1 SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." form included in Project Manual. 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and ---PAGE BREAK--- CONTRACT MODIFICATION 012600 - 2 finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 form included in Project Manual. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714 form included in Project Manual. B. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. C. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. ---PAGE BREAK--- CONTRACT MODIFICATION 012600 - 3 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 ---PAGE BREAK--- PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments; provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment. ---PAGE BREAK--- PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2 4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element. 5. Subschedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained design professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification of payment requests, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with the scope of each design services contract as described in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one- hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. ---PAGE BREAK--- PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the 30th day of the month. Review of draft copy of Application for Payment is a typical practice. Retain subparagraph below with paragraph retained above if required. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included in Project Manual. F. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values. G. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. ---PAGE BREAK--- PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. H. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. I. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. J. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. K. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. ---PAGE BREAK--- PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 5 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner. L. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. M. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. N. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." ---PAGE BREAK--- PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 6 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 017300 "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents during the construction period. B. BID RFI: Request from Contractor (or Sub Contractor through the General Contractor) seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents during the Bidding period. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will not respond or turn RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities other than the General Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4 C. RFI Forms: Generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, using software and format acceptable to Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow 7 working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use software log generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, using software and format acceptable to Architect. F. Project name. 1. Name and address of Contractor. 2. Name and address of Architect. 3. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 4. RFI description. 5. Date the RFI was submitted. 6. Date Architect's response was received. G. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5 1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. l. Preparation of record documents. m. Use of the premises and existing building. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Parking availability. u. Office, work, and storage areas. v. Equipment deliveries and priorities. w. First aid. x. Security. y. Progress cleaning. ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 20 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 8 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of proposal requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. F. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings if required. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and pre-installation conferences. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 9 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Work hours. 11) Hazards and risks. 12) Progress cleaning. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 ---PAGE BREAK--- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1 SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. ---PAGE BREAK--- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2 D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file. 3. Two paper copies. B. Startup construction schedule. 1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities. C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label. E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. ---PAGE BREAK--- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at intervals. H. Material Location Reports: Submit at intervals. I. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. J. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. K. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including work stage, area separations, interim milestones, and partial Owner occupancy of individual existing spaces. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. ---PAGE BREAK--- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. a. Aluminum Windows 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: ---PAGE BREAK--- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5 a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Building flush-out. m. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. b. Permanent space enclosure. c. Substantial Completion. D. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. ---PAGE BREAK--- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6 F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 20 days after date established the Notice to Proceed. ---PAGE BREAK--- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 7 a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Punch list and final completion. j. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. 5. Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under main subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. ---PAGE BREAK--- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 8 a. Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by Architect. b. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values). G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. H. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. 1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom. b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. ---PAGE BREAK--- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 9 2.5 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within 4 day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of ---PAGE BREAK--- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 10 results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 ---PAGE BREAK--- PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1 SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation. 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as project record documents at Project closeout. 3. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for photographic documentation before selective demolition operations commence. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Contractor to produce photos with digital equipment with qualified staff familiar with digital photography and lighting. B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. C. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, un-cropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file. 3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. ---PAGE BREAK--- PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 2 g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. 1.4 USAGE RIGHTS A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of demolition, take photographs of existing building elevations, individual window close-ups, details such as head, jamb, and sill conditions, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 013233 ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD Revisions 2006-2012 c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Harriman Digital Data Licensing Agreement included in Project Manual. d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline: 1) Demolition Plan ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 2) Floor plan. 3) Reflected Ceiling Plan 4) Interior Elevations 5) Schedules 6) Details 7) . B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 14 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned through Architect, before being returned to Contractor. D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point 061000.01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification. 4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor. a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information: 1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination 4) Source (From:). 5) Name and address of Architect. 6) Name of Contractor. 7) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 8) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 9) Category and type of submittal. 10) Submittal purpose and description. 11) Specification Section number and title. 12) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 13) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 14) Indication of full or partial submittal. 15) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 16) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 17) Remarks. 18) Signature of transmitter. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, and installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files to http://[EMAIL REDACTED]. Clearly identify Architect’s project name/number in the subject line. 2. Email (cc) Project Architect – Richard Borrelli, AIA, NCARB at [EMAIL REDACTED] a. Architect will return electronic annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3. Action Submittals: Submit four paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies and forward one copy to Owner. 4. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. Submit Product Data concurrent with Samples. 5. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Four paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies and forward one to the Owner. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm) 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file (PREFERRED) b. Four opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return two copies to general contractor and forward one to Owner. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit four full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect, will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit four sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least four sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation." G. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." I. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." J. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10 Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. S. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. T. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. U. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. V. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit one digitally signed PDF electronic file and four paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 11 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows: B. Stamp to be placed on Contractor’s Transmittal, leave room on said transmittal for Architect’s review stamp. C. The Architect’s marking of “Approved,” Approved as Noted” or similar verbiage means submittal has been reviewed for general conformance to the contract documents only and does not mean unqualified acceptance. The Contractor is fully responsible for compliance with the contract documents. ---PAGE BREAK--- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 12 D. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. E. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect F. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. G. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION 013300 ---PAGE BREAK--- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. ---PAGE BREAK--- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel. C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: ---PAGE BREAK--- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice of Award, and not less than 5 days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. 1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections." 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. ---PAGE BREAK--- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4 F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. ---PAGE BREAK--- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. ---PAGE BREAK--- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6 I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, [and ]mockups[, and laboratory mockups]; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 1.9 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. ---PAGE BREAK--- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. ---PAGE BREAK--- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 8 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality- control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections and in Statement of Special Inspections attached to this Section, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect, and Contractor of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. ---PAGE BREAK--- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution Requirements." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000 ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 1 SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 2 B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabc.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (202) 624-5800 www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.americanbearings.org ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700 (Formerly: ACI International) www.concrete.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 3 AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The) (703) 524-8800 www.ahrinet.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Inc. (607) 256-3313 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (See AHRI) ARI American Refrigeration Institute (See AHRI) ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 4 ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- Conditioning Engineers (800) 527-4723 www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Safety Engineers (The) (847) 699-2929 www.asse.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (202) 628-6380 www.atis.org AWEA American Wind Energy Association (202) 383-2500 www.awea.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636 www.awinet.org AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (403) 453-7387 www.awmac.com AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733-4077 (Formerly: American Wood-Preservers' Association) www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 5 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.gobrick.com BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association) www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org BOCA BOCA (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.) (See ICC) BWF Badminton World Federation 60 3 9283 7155 (Formerly: International Badminton Federation) www.bwfbadminton.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.electricity.ca CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858-1555 www.ce.org (703) 907-7600 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CFSEI Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute (866) 465-4732 www.cfsei.org (202) 263-4488 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (404) 622-0073 ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 6 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (703) 724-1128 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (706) 278-3176 www.carpet-rug.org CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (800) 328-6306 www.crsi.org (847) 517-1200 CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727 www.csa.ca (416) 747-4000 CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org CWC Composite Wood Council (See CPA) DASMA Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.dasma.com DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org ECA Electronic Components Association (703) 907-8024 www.ec-central.org ECAMA Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association (See ECA) EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (See TIA) ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 7 EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (703) 538-1616 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 (Electrostatic Discharge Association) www.esda.org ESTA Entertainment Services and Technology Association (See PLASA) EVO Efficiency Valuation Organization (415) 367-3643 www.evo-world.org 44 20 88 167 857 FIBA Fédération Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00 (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com FIVB Fédération Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 45 (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.org FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762-4300 www.fmglobal.com FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772 www.floridaroof.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council U.S. (612) 353-4511 www.fscus.org GA Gypsum Association (301) 277-8686 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 8 HI Hydraulic Institute (973) 267-9700 www.pumps.org HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association (See AHRI) HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAPSC International Association of Professional Security Consultants (415) 536-0288 www.iapsc.org IAS International Approval Services (See CSA) ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (202) 370-1800 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICPA International Cast Polymer Alliance (703) 525-0511 www.icpa-hq.org ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IES Illuminating Engineering Society (212) 248-5000 (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America) www.ies.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (See IES) ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 9 IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 981-0100 www.iest.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org IGSHPA International Ground Source Heat Pump Association (405) 744-5175 www.igshpa.okstate.edu ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com Intertek Intertek Group (800) 967-5352 (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA) www.intertek.com ISA International Society of Automation (The) (919) 549-8411 (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society) www.isa.org ISAS Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The) (See ISA) ISFA International Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association) (801) 341-7360 www.isfanow.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (See ISFA) ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (See CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MCA Metal Construction Association (847) 375-4718 ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 10 www.metalconstruction.org MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (888) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MMPA Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 (Formerly: Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association) (530) 661-9591 www.wmmpa.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. (703) 281-6613 www.mss-hq.org NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942-6591 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6223 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 11 NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (269) 488-6382 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFPA NFPA International (See NFPA) NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.nhla.com (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (See NWFA) NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association (888) 516-8585 www.nomma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers (703) 684-2800 www.nspe.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 12 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com NWFA National Wood Flooring Association (800) 422-4556 www.nwfa.org (636) 519-9663 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PLASA PLASA (212) 244-1505 (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association) www.plasa.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (706) 882-3833 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (925) 935-1499 www.redwoodinspection.com SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 (Society of Automotive Engineers) (724) 776-4841 www.sae.org SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (800) 542-5040 www.scte.org (610) 363-6888 SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424 SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE) ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 13 SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817-8888 www.siaonline.org (703) 683-2075 SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 293-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (773) 636-0672 www.smainfo.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (703) 803-2980 www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SRCC Solar Rating and Certification Corporation (321) 638-1537 www.solar-rating.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association (847) 681-1868 www.swpa.org TCA Tilt-Up Concrete Association (319) 895-6911 www.tilt-up.org TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 (Formerly: Tile Council of America) www.tileusa.com TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 14 www.tema.org TIA Telecommunications Industry Association (703) 907-7700 (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance) www.tiaonline.org TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance (See TIA) TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555 TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC) UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795-1747 www.usgbc.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.wcmanet.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 15 www.wdma.com (312) 321-6802 WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943 (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (See MMPA) WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 938-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up- to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V. 49 30 2601-0 www.din.de IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. COE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011 www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (301) 975-4040 National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-2664 http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 16 DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FG Federal Government Publications (202) 512-1800 www.gpo.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov (202) 619-8925 HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 Environmental Energy Technologies Division http://eetd.lbl.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov SD Department of State (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 National Cooperative Highway Research Program www.trb.org USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-3656 Agriculture Research Service U.S. Salinity Laboratory www.ars.usda.gov USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 Rural Utilities Service www.usda.gov USDJ Department of Justice (202) 307-0703 Office of Justice Programs National Institute of Justice www.ojp.usdoj.gov USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800) 227-8772 www.usp.org (301) 881-0666 USPS United States Postal Service (202) 268-2000 ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 17 www.usps.com E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-2664 Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dsp.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov (202) 619-8925 Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide (202) 289-7800 www.wbdg.org/ccb MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (See DOD) USAB United States Access Board (800) 872-2253 www.access-board.gov (202) 272-0080 USATBC B U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (See USAB) F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following ---PAGE BREAK--- REFERENCES 014200 - 18 list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CBHF State of California (800) 952-5210 Department of Consumer Affairs (916) 574-2041 Bureau of Electronic Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation www.bearhfti.ca.gov CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-6225 Office of Administrative Law California Title 24 Energy Code www.calregs.com CDHS California Department of Health Care Services (Formerly: California Department of Health Services) (See CCR) CDPH California Department of Public Health Indoor Air Quality Program www.cal-iaq.org CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (800) 848-5580 www.cpuc.ca.gov (415) 703-2782 SCAQM D South Coast Air Quality Management District www.aqmd.gov (909) 396-2000 TFS Texas Forest Service Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry (979) 458-6606 http://txforestservice.tamu.edu PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 ---PAGE BREAK--- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\015000.doc 015000 - 1 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 “Summary” for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Not applicable. Contractor to pay for temporary bathroom service use charges by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Owner will pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Owner will pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. E. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. F. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. ---PAGE BREAK--- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\015000.doc 015000 - 2 B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. 3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. D. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. ---PAGE BREAK--- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\015000.doc 015000 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails. B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts. C. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, 8 feet (2.4 m) high, framed with four 2-by-4-inch (50-by- 100-mm) rails, with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart. D. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. E. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914 by 1624 mm). 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 8 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height. ---PAGE BREAK--- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\015000.doc 015000 - 4 C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures". C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four- stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 “Summary”. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. ---PAGE BREAK--- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\015000.doc 015000 - 5 B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted. D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. E. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air- filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete. 2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust- producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust- containment devices. 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter- equipped vacuum equipment. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations should the existing electric power service lack capacity to perform required construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. ---PAGE BREAK--- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\015000.doc 015000 - 6 I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. J. Telephone Service: 1. All construction staff shall be provided with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio service equipment. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. C. Parking: Provide temporary off-site parking for construction personnel. D. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 “Execution Requirements”. F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered “tools and equipment” and not temporary facilities. ---PAGE BREAK--- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\015000.doc 015000 - 7 G. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will NOT be permitted. H. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 “Summary”. C. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 015639 “Temporary Tree and Plant Protection”. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. ---PAGE BREAK--- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\015000.doc 015000 - 8 I. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. J. Covered Walkway: Erect protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals through or adjacent to Project site. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. 2. Provide overhead decking, protective enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, exit signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. 3. Paint and maintain appearance of walkway for duration of the Work. K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. L. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood. 2. Seal joints and perimeter. 3. Protect air-handling equipment. 4. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise cutting operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. ---PAGE BREAK--- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\015000.doc 015000 - 9 B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. ---PAGE BREAK--- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\015000.doc 015000 - 10 C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 “Closeout Procedures”. END OF SECTION 015000 ---PAGE BREAK--- PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures” for requests for substitutions. 2. Section 014200 “References” for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms “material”, “equipment”, “system”, and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words “basis-of-design product”, including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. ---PAGE BREAK--- PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 “Submittal Procedures”. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 “Submittal Procedures”. Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. ---PAGE BREAK--- PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 “Closeout Procedures”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. ---PAGE BREAK--- PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term “as selected”, Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or “or approved equal”, or “or approved”, comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics ---PAGE BREAK--- PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5 that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 ---PAGE BREAK--- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 - 1 SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 4. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. ---PAGE BREAK--- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 - 2 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems. B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 2. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. ---PAGE BREAK--- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine existing window openings, brick masonry, existing wood blocking, interior walls, interior window trim for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. B. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. ---PAGE BREAK--- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 - 4 B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 “Project Management and Coordination”. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect B. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. Notify Owner and Architect in advance for work to be performed that will produce extended periods of loud noise. Owner to coordinate with Contractors to control disruptive noise. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. ---PAGE BREAK--- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 - 5 H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 “Summary”. F. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. ---PAGE BREAK--- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 - 6 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. H. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 OWNER COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's personnel at preinstallation conferences. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's personnel. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. ---PAGE BREAK--- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 - 7 C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 “Temporary Facilities and Controls”. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 “Quality Requirements”. ---PAGE BREAK--- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 - 8 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 017300 ---PAGE BREAK--- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation. 2. Section 017300 "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. ---PAGE BREAK--- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 4. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 5. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and with local emergency responders. 6. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 7. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. ---PAGE BREAK--- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 8. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for window, brick mold, wood trim, finishes, cleaning. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: ---PAGE BREAK--- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. c. Three paper copies. Architect will return two copies. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. ---PAGE BREAK--- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. If applicable, remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Sweep floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." ---PAGE BREAK--- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. END OF SECTION 017700 ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution Requirements" for final property survey. 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit two set(s) of marked-up record prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit two paper copies or one annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit two paper copies or one annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record- keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit tow paper copies or one annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated. ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive. d. Changes made following Architect's written orders. e. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. f. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. g. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS”. d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file or paper copy. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or paper copy. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or paper copy. ---PAGE BREAK--- PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 4 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 ---PAGE BREAK--- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\024119.doc 024119 - 1 SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of existing trim. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for temporary protection of exist- ing trees and plants that are affected by selective demolition. 3. Section 017300 "Execution Requirements" for cutting and patching procedures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent dam- age, and deliver to Owner ready for architectural salvage. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and rein- stalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be un- covered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and return to Owner. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-demolition Conference: Date, time, place of conference to be determined. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, ---PAGE BREAK--- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\024119.doc 024119 - 2 demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid de- lays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building managers and other tenants' on-site op- erations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. E. Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility li- censed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. ---PAGE BREAK--- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\024119.doc 024119 - 3 D. Hazardous Materials 1. Presents of hazardous materials is unknown 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Ar- chitect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and items to be selectively demolished. Testing existing building items associated with the scope of this project is the re- sponsibility of the General Contractor. 1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. F. Historic Areas: Demolition and hauling equipment and other materials shall be of sizes that clear surfaces within historic spaces, areas, rooms, and openings, including temporary protec- tion, by 2 feet or more. G. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. H. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before begin- ning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. If applicable, verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guaran- tee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of se- lective demolition required. D. When unanticipated existing conditions, mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that con- flict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. submit a written report to Architect. ---PAGE BREAK--- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\024119.doc 024119 - 4 E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings of ex- isting windows and brick molds for use in reproduction/manufacturing. Submit preconstruction photographs of each window assembly, details, interior, and exterior. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 “Photographic Documentation”. 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photo- graphs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be repro- duced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and pro- tect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Sec- tion 011000 “Summary”. B. Existing Services/Systems: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner and Building manager will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide tempo- rary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continui- ty of services/systems to other parts of building. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal opera- tions to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 “Tem- porary Facilities and Controls”. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent in- jury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 “Temporary Facilities and Controls”. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction be- ing demolished. ---PAGE BREAK--- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\024119.doc 024119 - 5 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new con- struction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cut- ting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Remove decayed, insect or vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materi- als and dispose of off-site. 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to im- pose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials Comply with requirements in Sec- tion. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition, cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or other- wise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. ---PAGE BREAK--- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\024119.doc 024119 - 6 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property. D. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demoli- tion operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition opera- tions began. END OF SECTION 024119 ---PAGE BREAK--- ROUGH CARPENTRY H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\061000_fl.doc 061000 - 1 SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Wood furring. 4. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. ---PAGE BREAK--- ROUGH CARPENTRY H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\061000_fl.doc 061000 - 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece . 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece . D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. ---PAGE BREAK--- ROUGH CARPENTRY H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\061000_fl.doc 061000 - 3 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire- test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece . E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings: 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. 4. Grounds. 5. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 7. Northern species; NLGA. 8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. ---PAGE BREAK--- ROUGH CARPENTRY H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\061000_fl.doc 061000 - 4 C. For utility shelving, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or No. 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. 3. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA. 3. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 4. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M . B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. ---PAGE BREAK--- ROUGH CARPENTRY H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\061000_fl.doc 061000 - 5 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. 2.6 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated . Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. C. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high- strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick. 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. ---PAGE BREAK--- ROUGH CARPENTRY H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\061000_fl.doc 061000 - 6 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. G. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board : Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. END OF SECTION 061000 ---PAGE BREAK--- INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\062023_fl.doc 062023 - 1 SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior trim, including non-fire-rated interior door and sidelight frames. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior finish carpentry. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical- treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified. 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Samples for Verification: 1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non-factory-applied finish, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. 2. For foam plastic moldings, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished; 50 sq. in.. 3. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. ---PAGE BREAK--- INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\062023_fl.doc 062023 - 2 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 2.2 INTERIOR TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish): 1. Species and Grade: yellow poplar; A Finish ; NHLA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Allowed . 4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth) . 5. Optional Material: Primed MDF of same actual dimensions as lumber indicated may be used in lieu of lumber. B. Hardwood Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): WMMPA HWM 2, N- grade wood moldings made to patterns included in WMMPA HWM 1. 1. Custom knives exist to produce specific moldings shown on drawing. Specified manufacturer is; ---PAGE BREAK--- INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\062023_fl.doc 062023 - 3 a. Attn: Carter Edwards, Selmore Fixture Manufacturing Co., Inc. 57 Whipple Street Lewiston, ME 04240 (207) 782-2337 2. Species: Poplar. 3. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 4. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 5. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color. 6. Base Pattern: Reference drawings. 7. Shoe-Mold Pattern: Reference drawings. 8. Casing Pattern: Reference drawings. 9. Mull-Casing Pattern: Reference drawings. 10. Stop Pattern: Reference drawings. 11. Chair-Rail Pattern: Reference drawings. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. B. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. ---PAGE BREAK--- INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\062023_fl.doc 062023 - 4 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full- surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment. 1. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed. 2. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. ---PAGE BREAK--- INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\062023_fl.doc 062023 - 5 B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 062023 ---PAGE BREAK--- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064000.doc SECTION 064000 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Custom interior standing and running trim. 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 3. Glazing Film B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. B. Exposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. C. Semiexposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as "semiexposed." D. Concealed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and tall cabinets are defined as "concealed." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes. C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. ---PAGE BREAK--- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064000.doc 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork. D. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, 5 inches wide by 24 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the Quality Standards as well as additional requirements beyond those of the Quality Standards. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the Quality Standards. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. ---PAGE BREAK--- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 - 3 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064000.doc 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. If a quality grade is not specified, provide AWI Custom Grade. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White oak, rift sawn or cutGlazing Film: 3M Fasara Decorative Window Films: 1 Lausanne Decorative / Privacy Glazing Film C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate, PL: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturers: a. Countertop and Vertical Surfaces: Pionite; a division of Panolam Industries International Inc. 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on Materials Legend. D. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Shall be as follows: 1. Countertops: Self edged. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use and substrate. Comply with ASME B 18.6.1 for applicable requirements. 1. For metal framing supports, provide screw as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. E. Adhesives Used on the Job Site, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. F. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues Used on the Job Site: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to ---PAGE BREAK--- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 - 4 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064000.doc South Coast Air Quality Management district (SCAQMD) Rule 1168 as amended January 7, 2005: 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 3. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated. When quality grade is not indicated, provide Custom quality grade. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. 2.4 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Grade: Premium C. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. D. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width or thickness. E. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. F. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. G. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. H. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated 1. Provide split species on trim that face areas with different wood species, matching each face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished. 2.5 SHELVING A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements. B. Grade: Custom. C. Adjustable Shelving in Exposed Locations: Plastic laminate on 3/4-inch particleboard. 1. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces; all sides. 2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS ---PAGE BREAK--- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 - 5 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064000.doc A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets. B. Grade: Custom. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGL. 2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS. 3. Edges: VGS. E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative overlay. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay. F. Base Cabinets: Bottoms and ends of cabinets, exposed backs, and tops of cabinets; 3/4-inch particleboard, plastic laminate faced on exposed surfaces, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced on semi-exposed surfaces. 1. Backs of Cabinets: 3/8-inch plywood. Back mounted to side, bottom and top; inset 3/4- inch to conceal mounting rails. Tall cabinets shall have rails positioned at top and intermediate location. Base cabinet shall have mounting rail positioned at the top. 2. Mounting Rails: 3/4-inch thick, fastened to cabinet back on interior of cabinet or as indicated in details. 3. Cabinet Sub-Base: Separate and continuous (no cabinet body sides to floor), water resistant exterior grade plywood with concealed fastening to cabinet bottom. Ladder type construction of front, back, and intermediates to form a secure and level platform to which cabinets attach. 4. Depth: Provide cabinets of the type indicated meeting the following: a. Deep Cabinet: Minimum outside depth of 23 inches from wall to face of cabinet box, less the door (approximately 24 inches from wall to face of door). b. Shallow Cabinet: Minimum outside depth of 13 inches from wall to face of cabinet box, less the door (approximately 14 inches from wall to face of door). G. Wall Cabinets: Ends of cabinets and exposed backs; 3/4-inch particleboard, plastic-laminate faced on exposed surfaces, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced on semi-exposed surfaces. Tops and bottoms of cabinets; 1-inch particleboard, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced. 1. Backs of Cabinets: 3/8-inch plywood, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced surfaces with balance sheet on concealed side. Back mounted to side bottom and top, inset 3/4-inch to conceal mounting rails. Cabinets shall have rails positioned at top and bottom location. 2. Mounting Rails: 3/4-inch thick, fastened to back of cabinet on interior of cabinet or as indicated in details. 3. Depth: Wall hung cabinets shall have a minimum outside depth of 13 inches from wall to face of cabinet box, less the door (approximately 14 inches from wall to face of door). H. Inside Corners: Construct cabinets and fillers at inside corners to allow for proper clearance and operation of drawers and doors. ---PAGE BREAK--- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 - 6 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064000.doc I. Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch thick particleboard, plastic-laminate faced on exposed surfaces, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced on semi-exposed surfaces, applied to separate drawer body sub-front. J. Drawer Bodies: 1/2-inch thick MDF or plywood sides, back, and sub-fronts with dadoed, pinned and glued joints. MDF bottom, 1/4-inch thick, rabbeted into sides, back and sub-front, and glued. All surfaces inside and outside of drawer box shall be covered with melamine finish. Reinforce drawer bottoms with 1/2-inch by 4-inch front to back, hardwood intermediate stiffeners, glued and fastened in place. Provide one stiffener for drawers to 24 inches wide, two to 36 inches wide and four to 48 inches wide. K. Solid Doors: 3/4-inch thick particleboard or medium-density fiberboard, plastic-laminate faced on exposed surface, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced on semi-exposed surfaces. L. Dividers: 3/4-inch thick particleboard or medium-density fiberboard, plastic-laminate faced on exposed surface, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced on semi-exposed surfaces. M. Shelving: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard meeting the following: 1. Open Shelving: 1-inch thick shelving for all widths, unless indicated otherwise. Top of shelves faced with plastic-laminate. Underside of shelves, melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced. 2. Behind Solid Doors: 3/4-inch thick for cabinets up to 24 inches wide. 1-inch thick shelving for cabinets 24 inches and greater wide. Melamine or plastic laminate cabinet liner faced. N. Edgebanding: Color to match surfacing material. Finished edgebanding shall be uniform in color and sheen. 1. Exposed and Semi-Exposed Shelving: Plastic laminate. 2. Doors and Drawer Fronts: Plastic laminate. 3. Drawer Bodies: 1 mm PVC applied to all edges, semi-exposed and concealed locations (top, back and bottom edges). 4. Cabinet Bodies: 1 mm PVC applied to all exposed and semi-exposed edges. 5. Dividers: 1 mm PVC. O. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Match color, pattern, and finish as indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations for these characteristics. 2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400C requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops. B. Grade: Custom. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Match color, pattern, and finish as indicated by manufacturer's designations for these characteristics. ---PAGE BREAK--- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 - 7 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064000.doc E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Particleboard made with exterior glue. 1. Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood. 2. Cutouts and Holes for Sinks and Fittings: Make cutouts for sinks and fittings in shop using template or pattern furnished by manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves with edges at right angles to top. 2.8 WINDOW SILLS A. Aluminum Window Sills: Fabricate from aluminum break metal to match windows as indicated on drawings. 2.9 SHOP FINISHING A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated. B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative overlay. D. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. ---PAGE BREAK--- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 - 8 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064000.doc B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. G. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 3. Calk space between and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 PROTECTION ---PAGE BREAK--- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 - 9 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064000.doc A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 064000 ---PAGE BREAK--- WOOD TRIM H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064600.doc 064600 - 1 SECTION 064600 - WOOD TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 3. Shop priming of wood trim. 4. Shop finishing of wood trim. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, and shims required for installing wood trim and concealed within other construction before wood trim installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. B. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Shop-applied opaque finishes. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Wood Trim Sample for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Wood Trim Sample for opaque finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. ---PAGE BREAK--- WOOD TRIM H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064600.doc 064600 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical wood trim as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wood trim until operations that could damage wood trim have been completed in installation areas. If wood trim must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood trim until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood trim until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood trim can be supported and installed as indicated. ---PAGE BREAK--- WOOD TRIM H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064600.doc 064600 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide: labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. 2.2 RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Regional Materials (Preferred, but not required): Exterior trim for transparent finish shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. C. Species: Oak, Maple or Mahogany, match existing. To be verified in field as species may vary from room to room. 2.3 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Regional Materials (Preferred, but not required): Exterior trim for transparent finish shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. C. Species: White Poplar 2.4 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (75 mm) wide. 2. Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 5 to 10 percent. ---PAGE BREAK--- WOOD TRIM H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064600.doc 064600 - 4 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Exterior Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, pressure-preservative treated, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 1. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. c. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Interior Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. C. Nails for Exterior Use: hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel. D. Screws for Exterior Use: hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel. E. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. F. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous- metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. G. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. H. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." I. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 3. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. 4. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: ---PAGE BREAK--- WOOD TRIM H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064600.doc 064600 - 5 1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated. C. Back-out or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Assemble casings in shop except where shipping limitations require field assembly. E. Assemble moldings in shop to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in shop and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Interior Wood Trim for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 099000 "Interior Painting." B. Interior Wood Trim for Transparent Finish: Shop seal with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Section 099300 “Staining and Transparent Finishing”. C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood trim, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces. 2.8 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish wood trim at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. General: Shop finish transparent-finished wood trim at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Section 099000 "Interior Painting" for field finishing opaque-finished wood trim. C. General: Drawings indicate items that are required to be shop finished. Finish such items at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Section 099000 "Interior Painting" and Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for field finishing wood trim not indicated to be shop finished. D. Finish Materials: Use finish materials that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." ---PAGE BREAK--- WOOD TRIM H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064600.doc 064600 - 6 E. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood trim, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces. F. Transparent Finish for Interior Trim: 1. Grade: Same as item to be finished. 2. Finish: System - water-based polyurethane. 3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Staining: Match existing, field verify. 5. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 6. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash-coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 7. Sheen: Match existing: Flat- 15-30, Satin - 31-45 Semigloss, - 46-60, Gloss - 61-100 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. G. Opaque Finish for Interior Trim: 1. Grade: Same as item to be finished. 2. Finish: System - water-based latex acrylic. 3. Color: Match existing, field verify. 4. Sheen: Match existing: Flat- 15-30, Satin - 31-45 Semigloss, - 46-60, Gloss - 61-100 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural wood trim, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install wood trim to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble wood trim and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/16” within ---PAGE BREAK--- WOOD TRIM H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\064600.doc 064600 - 7 D. Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes according to AWPA M4. F. Anchor wood trim to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood trim. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop. H. Refer to Section 099000 "Interior Painting" and Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for final finishing of installed wood trim not indicated to be shop finished. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective wood trim, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood trim. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean wood trim on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064600 ---PAGE BREAK--- HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081113_fl.doc 081113 - 1 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. ---PAGE BREAK--- HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081113_fl.doc 081113 - 2 C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY. 3. SteelCraft Mfg. Co. B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Hollow-Metal Doors and Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 860. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule . 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Construction: Knocked down . 3. Exposed Finish: Prime. ---PAGE BREAK--- HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081113_fl.doc 081113 - 3 2.3 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. B. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. ---PAGE BREAK--- HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081113_fl.doc 081113 - 4 C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. 2.6 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. ---PAGE BREAK--- HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081113_fl.doc 081113 - 5 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. d. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. c. At Bottom of Door: [3/4 inch] [5/8 inch] plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. ---PAGE BREAK--- HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081113_fl.doc 081113 - 6 END OF SECTION 081113 ---PAGE BREAK--- FLUSH WOOD DOORS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081416_fl.doc 081416 - 1 SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 062023 "Interior Finish Carpentry " for wood door frames. 2. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 3. Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for field finishing doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. ---PAGE BREAK--- FLUSH WOOD DOORS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081416_fl.doc 081416 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons . C. Mark each door ontop and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Exterior Doors: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following : 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Marshfield Inc. 4. VT Industries Inc. 5. . ---PAGE BREAK--- FLUSH WOOD DOORS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081416_fl.doc 081416 - 3 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. C. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors asneeded to eliminate through-bolting hardware. a. 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. c. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. D. Provide doors with structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.Interior Solid-Core Doors : 1. Grade: [Premium, with Grade A faces] . 2. Species: Select white maple . 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced) . 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 6. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room or area of building. 7. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces - edge Type A . 8. . 9. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty . 2.3 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS A. Wood Frames for Light Openings in Doors: Flush, solid wood or veneer wrapped, of same species as door facing, mitered corners, factory glazed. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. ---PAGE BREAK--- FLUSH WOOD DOORS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081416_fl.doc 081416 - 4 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. 1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with AWI’s “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated,” Section 1500 for factory finishing. B. Finish door at factory C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Custom 2. Finish: AWI System, TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane 3. Staining: None required 4. Sheen: Satin PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ---PAGE BREAK--- FLUSH WOOD DOORS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081416_fl.doc 081416 - 5 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 ---PAGE BREAK--- STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081433_fl.doc 081433 - 1 SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior stile and rail wood doors. 2. Finishing stile and rail wood doors. 3. Fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 for requirements for veneers from the same flitches for both wood paneling and stile and rail wood doors. 2. Division 09 for field finishing stile and rail doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include details of construction and glazing. 2. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data, including the following: 1. Dimensions of doors for factory fitting. 2. Locations and dimensions of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Undercuts. 4. Requirements for veneer matching. 5. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. C. Samples for Verification: Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches , with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish Sample with stain to match existing doors on first floor. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of door, from manufacturer. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. C. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. ---PAGE BREAK--- STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081433_fl.doc 081433 - 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship, or have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Interior Doors: One year . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors from single manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements specified. 1. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites, including components, with wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. 2. Assemble interior doors, including components, with either dry-use or wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. B. Panel Products: Any of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Particleboard made from wood particles, with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde, complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 2.3 INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS (Alternate) A. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Interior doors complying with WDMA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," and with other requirements specified. ---PAGE BREAK--- STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081433_fl.doc 081433 - 3 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Belentry Doors LLC. b. International Door and Latch. c. JELD-WEN, Inc. d. Karona, Inc. e. QSM Enterprise, Inc. f. Simpson Door Company. 2. Finish and Grade: Transparent and Premium or Select . 3. Wood Species: Select White Maple to match existing doors and trim on first floor. 4. Stile and Rail Construction: veneered, structural composite lumber . 5. Raised-Panel Construction: Veneered panel product . 6. Flat-Panel Construction: Veneered panel product . 7. Raised-Panel Thickness: Match existing first floor doors. 8. Flat-Panel Thickness: Match existing first floor doors. 9. Molding Profile (Sticking): Match existing first floor doors. 10. Glass: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.0 mm thick complying with Section 088000 "Glazing." 11. Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with WDMA I.S.6 and grade specified. Include panel design number if applicable. 2.4 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for field fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels unless otherwise indicated: 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide not more than 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. D. Glazed Openings: Factory install glazing in doors, complying with Section 088000 "Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable wood moldings. Miter wood moldings at corner joints. E. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. ---PAGE BREAK--- STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081433_fl.doc 081433 - 4 2.5 FINISHING A. Finish wood doors at woodworking shop. B. Finish wood doors at woodworking shop that are indicated to receive stained finish. C. Finish wood doors at woodworking shop where indicated in schedules or on Drawings. D. For doors indicated to be shop finished, comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards," and with other requirements specified. 1. Finish faces and all four edges of doors, including mortises and cutouts. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. E. Stained Finish: 1. Grade: Premium . 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 10, UV curable, water based . 3. Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish . 4. Staining: Match existing first floor doors. 5. Effect: Match existing first floor doors. 6. Sheen: Satin . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire- rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. ---PAGE BREAK--- STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\081433_fl.doc 081433 - 5 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Shop-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081433 ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Non-fire-rated sliding doors. c. Non-fire-rated folding doors. 2. Electrified door hardware. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metal frames. 2. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for integral intumescent seals provided as part of fire-rated labeled assemblies. 3. Division 08 Section "Stile and Rail Wood Doors" C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 1. Permanent cylinders to be furnished and installed by Owner. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals for Sections 081113, 081416 081433 and 087100 shall be made concurrently. B. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Delete subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below if electrified door hardware is not complex only electromagnetic locks or electric strikes are required). D. Samples for Verification: Submit minimum 2-by-4-inch plate Samples of each type of finish required, except primed finish. E. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 a. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and date each page. b. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. c. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame. 2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device. 3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 8) Door and frame sizes and materials. 9) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. a) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter; authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter; unauthorized person wants to exit. 10) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. d. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential Product Data to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Submit the final door hardware sets after Samples, Product Data, coordination with Shop Drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar information has been completed and accepted. 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, signed by product manufacturer. 1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors complies with listed fire door assemblies. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks latches delayed-egress locks and closers. C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and schedule. ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Door Hardware: Provide hardware as required by accessibility regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. 3) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Delayed-Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force not more than 15 lbf for not more than 3 seconds. c. Door Closers: Not more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open door to minimum required width. d. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. 3. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated. E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water. F. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. E. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide for proper operation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows: a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 HINGES, GENERAL A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. 3. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. 4. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. C. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges. 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Antifriction-bearing hinges. D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin. 2. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin. E. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings: 1. Corners: Square. F. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors and wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 2.3 HINGES A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7. C. Available Manufacturers: 1. Hager Companies (HAG). 2. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). 3. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). D. The following is a guide for hinge size and type required for this project. Manufacturer Interior: 1-3/4” Doors Stanley FBB179-4 1/2" up to 3’-0” wide Hager BB1279-4 1/2" McKinney TA-TB2714-4 1/2" 1-3/4” Doors Stanley FBB168-4 1/2" over 3’-0” wide Hager BB1168-4 1/2" McKinney T4A-T4B3786-4 1/2" 2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. C. Electrified Locking Devices: BHMA A156.25. D. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: Cast. 2. Escutcheons (Roses): Forged. 3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw. F. Rabbeted Meeting Doors: Provide special rabbeted front and strike on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 G. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. H. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows: 1. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 2. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 3. Strikes for Interconnected Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.12. 4. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 5. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 7. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 2.5 MORTISED LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: a. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an Assa Abloy Group company (SGT). b. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). B. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA Grade 1; Series 1000. 1. Provide one of the following manufacturers and designs: a. Sargent 8200 Series b. Schlage L9000 Series C. Lock Trim: Comply with the following: 1. Lockset Designs: Provide the lockset design designated below or, if sets are provided by another manufacturer, provide designs that match those designated: a. Sargent, YCE design b. Schlage 2.6 EXIT DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Precision Hardware, Inc. (PH). 2. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an Assa Abloy Group company (SGT). 3. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD). B. Products: All exit devices for this project shall be one of the following: 1. Precision Olympian Series 2. The 80 Series exit device by Sargent & Co. 3. 98 Series by Von Duprin Division C. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. D. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. E. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. F. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. G. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. H. Outside Trim: Pull with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Standard: BHMA A156.31, Grade 1. B. General: Use fail-secure electric strikes with fire-rated devices. 1. In particular the electric strikes shall carry a listing under the category of "single point locks or latches" for use with single swing fire doors having a 3-hour rating or less. 2. Provide solenoid actuated by a 24 VAC or DC current and face plate shall be in US 26D finish. 3. Manufacture of corrosion resistant metals with a cast stainless steel case and working parts, and stainless steel springs. 4. Provide horizontal adjustment for misalignment, and shall be reversible and capable of accepting locksets specified in the lock or exit devise section of the specification. 5. Electric strikes shall fit a cutout in the frame not less than 9" high x 1 3/8" wide with a frame face cutout of 1 1/2" wide and 3 3/4" high. C. Available Manufacturers: 1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). 2. Folger Adam Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (FAS). 3. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (HES). 4. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LSE). 5. Precision Hardware, Inc. (PH). 2.8 OPERATING TRIM A. Standard: BHMA A156.6. B. Materials: Fabricate from stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Available Manufacturers: 1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 2. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 3. Hager Companies (HAG). 4. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 5. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). D. Door Pulls, 1 inch diameter. 1. Size: ADA compliant, unless indicated otherwise, provide 10 inches center to center, with 3 1/2 inch projection and 2 1/2 inch clearance. 2. Available Products: a. Hager Companies, H4J. b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company; 8103EZ. 2.9 CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Surface-Mounted Closers: a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). b. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). C. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open door to minimum required width. E. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. LCN: a. Exterior: 4040 Series b. Interior: 4040 Series 2. Sargent: a. Exterior: 281 b. Interior: 281 F. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3. ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 2.10 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Size: 1-1/2 inches less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screws. C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from the following material: 1. Material: 0.050-inch- thick stainless steel. 2. Available Manufacturers: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). b. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). c. Hager Companies (HAG). d. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). D. Fabricate protection plates as follows: 1. Push Plates: 16" high by 8" wide. 2. Kick Plates: 10" high by 1-1/2" less than door width for single doors and 1" less than door width for pairs of doors. Kick plates shall be applied to push side of all doors where noted. 3. Armor Plates: 40" high by 1-1/2" less than door width for single doors and 1" less than door width for pairs of doors. E. Door Edge: Provide door edge where indicated. 2.11 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 1. Provide wall stops for doors unless floor or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. 2. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set (or push-pull units if no latch-lock sets) for color and texture. B. Wall Stops: Wall type bumpers with concealed type flange shall be used where ever possible. 1. Available Products: a. Ives - 407 1/2 b. Door Controls - 3211T c. Rockwood - 409 C. Floor Stops: Where wall type bumpers cannot be used, provide dome type, floor mounted stops of the proper height as follows: 1. Available Products: a. Ives - 436, 438 b. Door Controls - 3310X, 3320X ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 c. Rockwood - 440, 442 D. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum 5/8 by 3/4 inch; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. E. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. 2.12 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 1. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. Basis-of-Design Product, No. 95WH by National Guard Products or approved substitute. B. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke- control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on fire-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors. Basis- of-Design Product, No. 5050 by National Guard Products or approved substitute. 2.13 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. c. Closers to doors and frames. ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications unless door blocking is provided: a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames. c. Surface-mounted exit devices. 4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.14 FINISHES A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Provide the following finishes: 1. Butts and Hinges: 3 2. Locks & Lock Trim: 3 3. Exit Devices: 3 4. Door Controls - Closers: Sprayed brass. Finish 5. Mortise Locks & Latches: 3 6. Door Stops 3 7. Kickplates 3 8. Pulls 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. 1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A250.6. ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13 B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." ---PAGE BREAK--- DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets listed below indicate the items of hardware required for each opening. It is the bidder’s responsibility to accurately furnish the proper quantities, items, sizes, weights and functions as required by the plans and specifications. If an opening has, through error, been omitted from the following hardware sets, it shall be the bidder’s responsibility to supply hardware of equivalent quality and quantity, as that which is specified for a comparable opening. HW SET 1 DOORS 201A EACH LEAF SHALL HAVE- HINGES, LOCKSET (EXIT LATCH FUNCTION), ELECTRIC STRIKE, DOOR PULL, DOOR CLOSER, KICK PLATE, DOOR STOP HW SET 2 DOORS 201B-202 EACH LEAF SHALL HAVE -HINGES, LOCKSET (CLASS ROOM FUNCTION), DOR CLOSER, KICK PLATE, DOOR STOP HE SET 3 DOORS 203C EACH LEAF SHALL HAVE- HINGES, LOCKSET (PASSAGE FUNCTION), DOOR STOP HW SET 4 DOORS 203A EACH LEAF SHALL HAVE- HINGES, EXIT DEVICE ( EXIT ONLY FUNCTION), DOOR CLOSER, DOOR STOP END OF SECTION 087100 ---PAGE BREAK--- GLAZING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\088000_fl.doc 088000 - 1 SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Interior borrowed lites. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. ---PAGE BREAK--- GLAZING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\088000_fl.doc 088000 - 2 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. C. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC . Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. ---PAGE BREAK--- GLAZING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\088000_fl.doc 088000 - 3 B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.4 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 2.5 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type : Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm . 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. ---PAGE BREAK--- GLAZING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\088000_fl.doc 088000 - 4 B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. ---PAGE BREAK--- GLAZING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\088000_fl.doc 088000 - 5 L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 088000 ---PAGE BREAK--- NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\092216_fl.doc 092216 - 1 SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch . b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings . C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. ---PAGE BREAK--- NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\092216_fl.doc 092216 - 2 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Steel Network Inc; VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track Systems (SFT). D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches . 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch . 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings . F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical . G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch . 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. ---PAGE BREAK--- NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\092216_fl.doc 092216 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. ---PAGE BREAK--- NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\092216_fl.doc 092216 - 4 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. D. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 092216 ---PAGE BREAK--- GYPSUM BOARD H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\092900_fl.doc 092900 - 1 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. ---PAGE BREAK--- GYPSUM BOARD H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\092900_fl.doc 092900 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Lafarge North America Inc. 2. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered . 2.2 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc . 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. 2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping or drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose compound. ---PAGE BREAK--- GYPSUM BOARD H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\092900_fl.doc 092900 - 3 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: Not required. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. ---PAGE BREAK--- GYPSUM BOARD H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\092900_fl.doc 092900 - 4 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated . B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws . ---PAGE BREAK--- GYPSUM BOARD H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\092900_fl.doc 092900 - 5 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges . 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated . 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Where indicated on Drawings . 3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings . 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated . a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 5. Level 5: Not required. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. ---PAGE BREAK--- GYPSUM BOARD H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\092900_fl.doc 092900 - 6 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 ---PAGE BREAK--- ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\095123_fl.doc 095123 - 1 SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical tiles for ceilings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency . 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 10 percent of quantity installed. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. ---PAGE BREAK--- ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\095123_fl.doc 095123 - 2 B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. C. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. World Industries, Inc.; Ultima World Tegular B. World Industries, Inc.; Ultima World TegularColor: White . C. LR: Not less than 0.90. D. NRC: Not less than 0.70 . E. CAC: Not less than 35 . F. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled Tegular. G. Thickness: 3/4 inch . H. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for ---PAGE BREAK--- ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\095123_fl.doc 095123 - 3 compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095123 ---PAGE BREAK--- RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096513_fl.doc 096513 - 1 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F , in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F . C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. ---PAGE BREAK--- RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096513_fl.doc 096513 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous) . 2. Style and Location: a. Style A, Straight: . C. Thickness: 0.125 inch . D. Height: 4 inches . E. Coils in manufacturer's standard length . F. Outside Corners: Preformed . G. Inside Corners: Job formed . H. Colors: As noted on finish schedule. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. ---PAGE BREAK--- RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096513_fl.doc 096513 - 3 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. ---PAGE BREAK--- RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096513_fl.doc 096513 - 4 G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum possible. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 ---PAGE BREAK--- RESILIENT TILE FLOORING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096519_fl.doc 096519 - 1 SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl Plank. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. C. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated. ---PAGE BREAK--- RESILIENT TILE FLOORING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096519_fl.doc 096519 - 2 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F , in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F . C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL PLANK A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company; I.D. Premier Luxury Plank Vinyl Flooring B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700. 1. Class: Class I, monolithic vinyl tile . 2. Type: A, smooth surface . C. Thickness: 0.028 inch. D. Size: 37 by 6.16 inches. E. Colors and Patterns: Refer to finish schedule. ---PAGE BREAK--- RESILIENT TILE FLOORING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096519_fl.doc 096519 - 3 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents. C. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended by access flooring manufacturer. D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. E. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. F. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile. ---PAGE BREAK--- RESILIENT TILE FLOORING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096519_fl.doc 096519 - 4 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis . C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction . D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. ---PAGE BREAK--- RESILIENT TILE FLOORING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096519_fl.doc 096519 - 5 END OF SECTION 096519 ---PAGE BREAK--- TILE CARPETING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096813_fl.doc 096813 - 1 SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular, tufted carpet tile. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" Section 096519 "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. ---PAGE BREAK--- TILE CARPETING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096813_fl.doc 096813 - 2 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, loss of face fiber, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following : 1. J&J/Invision, Impact Modular (7978). B. Color: 1451 Meld. C. Pattern: Ashlar. D. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6. E. Fiber Type: J&J Encore BCF Nylon (with recycled content). F. Pile Characteristic: Level-loop pile. G. Dye Method: Solution/Yarn Dyed. ---PAGE BREAK--- TILE CARPETING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096813_fl.doc 096813 - 3 H. Density: 6,410 oz./cu. yd.. I. Pile Thickness: 1/4” for finished carpet tile. J. Stitches: 12.1 stitches/in. K. Gage: 1/12. L. Surface Pile Weight: 20 oz./sq. yd.. M. Primary Backing/Backcoating: PVC. N. Backing System: Nexus Modular. O. Size: 24 by 24 inches. P. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: ProTex & ColorLoc Plus. Q. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.0 minimum according to ASTM D 7330. 2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 3. Delamination: Not less than 3.5 lbf/in. according to ASTM D 3936. 4. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165. 5. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) according to AATCC 16, Option E. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. For wood subfloors, verify the following: 1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." 2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ---PAGE BREAK--- TILE CARPETING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\096813_fl.doc 096813 - 4 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer . C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096813 ---PAGE BREAK--- INTERIOR PAINTING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\099123_fl.doc 099123 - 1 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Tin. 2. Wood. 3. Gypsum board. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. ---PAGE BREAK--- INTERIOR PAINTING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\099123_fl.doc 099123 - 2 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COLORS AND FINISHES A. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes, are indicated in "schedules" in the contract documents. B. Prior to beginning work, Architect will make selection from manufacturer's complete range of colors for surfaces to be painted. C. Color Pigments: Pure, nonfading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated. D. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats as scheduled. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. 2.2 MATERIAL QUALITY A. Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are intended to imply that products of named manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. 2. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. B. Materials are designated in schedules by reference to products of the ICI Paint Stores, no exceptions. ---PAGE BREAK--- INTERIOR PAINTING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\099123_fl.doc 099123 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Wood: 15 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Tin Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. E. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. ---PAGE BREAK--- INTERIOR PAINTING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\099123_fl.doc 099123 - 4 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. ---PAGE BREAK--- INTERIOR PAINTING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\099123_fl.doc 099123 - 5 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. IPS - 1 Gypsum Drywall, Ceilings: Flat acrylic finish; 2 finish coats over primer as follows: 1. Prime Coat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Latex Primer B11W900 Series; 1.3 mils DFT. 2. First Finish Coat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series; 3.4 mils DFT. 3. Second Finish Coat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series; 3.4 mils DFT. B. IPS - 2 Gypsum Drywall Walls for Vinyl Wall Coverings: Prime walls designated to receive vinyl wall coverings with the following: 1. Prime Coat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Latex Primer B11W900 Series; 1.3 mils DFT. C. IPS - 3 Gypsum Drywall, Walls: Low-luster (Eggshell) finish; 2 finish coats over primer as follows: 1. Prime Coat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Latex Primer B11W900 Series; 1.3 mils DFT. 2. First Finish Coat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Latex Eg-Shel B9 Series; 3.2 mils DFT. 3. Second Finish Coat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Latex Eg-Shel B9 Series; 3.2 mils DFT. D. IPS - 4 Natural Finish Woodwork: Alkyd-based, satin-varnish finish; 3 finish coats of an alkyd-based, clear-satin varnish over an alkyd-based, interior wood stain as follows: 1. Stain: 1700-XXXX, Woodpride Interior Solventborne Wood Finishing Stain. 2. First Finish Coat: 1902-0000, Woodpride Interior Polyurethane Satin Varnish. 3. Second Finish Coat: 1902-0000, Woodpride Interior Polyurethane Satin Varnish. 4. Third Finish Coat: 1902-0000, Woodpride Interior Polyurethane Satin Varnish. E. IPS - 5 Ferrous Metal: Semigloss acrylic enamel finish; 2 finish coats over touch-up primer as follows: 1. Touch-Up Prime Coat, Where Required: Sherwin Williams IMC DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish, B66W1; 3.0 mils DFT. 2. First Finish Coat: Sherwin Williams IMC DTM Acrylic Coating Semi-Gloss (Waterborne) B66W200 Series; 7.0 mils DFT. 3. Second Finish Coat: Sherwin Williams IMC DTM Acrylic Coating Semi-Gloss (Waterborne) B66W200 Series; 7.0 mils DFT. END OF SECTION 099123 ---PAGE BREAK--- STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\099300_fl.doc 099300 - 1 SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for stains and transparent finishes on concrete floors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated. 1. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches square. 2. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. ---PAGE BREAK--- STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\099300_fl.doc 099300 - 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the category indicated. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated. C. Stain Colors: Stain to match existing on first floor. ---PAGE BREAK--- STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\099300_fl.doc 099300 - 3 2.3 STAINS A. Stain, Exterior, Water Based, Solid Hide: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); stain to match existing on first floor. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample wood finishing materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying wood finishes if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces before refinishing with complying materials if the two finishes are incompatible or produce results that, in the opinion of the Architect, are aesthetically unacceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 9 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. ---PAGE BREAK--- STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\099300_fl.doc 099300 - 4 B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. D. Interior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish. 3. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. ---PAGE BREAK--- STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\099300_fl.doc 099300 - 5 C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including doors. 1. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System: a. Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood. b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. c. Second Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: water-based polyurethane, satin (Gloss Level END OF SECTION 099300 ---PAGE BREAK--- HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\122113_fl.doc 122113 - 1 SECTION 122113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Window-Treatment Schedule: For horizontal louver blinds. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of horizontal louver blind. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, texture, pattern, and gloss indicated, but no fewer than two units. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. ---PAGE BREAK--- HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\122113_fl.doc 122113 - 2 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hunter Douglas Contract. 2. Levolor Contract; a Newell Rubbermaid company. B. Graber.Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radius corners. 1. Width: 1 inch . 2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard . 3. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard . 4. Finish: Ionized antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish . 5. Features: a. Lift-Cord Rout Holes: Minimum size required for lift cord and located near back (outside) edge of slat to maximize slat overlap and minimize light gaps between slats. C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled. Headrails fully enclose operating mechanisms on three sides. 1. Capacity: One blind per headrail unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ends: Manufacturer's standard . 3. Manual Lift Mechanism: ---PAGE BREAK--- HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\122113_fl.doc 122113 - 3 a. Lift-Cord Lock: Variable; stops lift cord at user-selected position within blind full operating range . b. Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift-cord lock mechanism to form cord pull. 4. Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod that adjusts ladders. a. Tilt: Full. b. Tilt: One -direction, positive stop or lockout limited at an angle of 60 degrees from horizontal, both directions. c. Operator: Clear-plastic wand . d. Over-Rotation Protection: Manufacturer's detachable operator or slip clutch to prevent over rotation of gear. 5. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Manufacturer's standard . 6. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Locations: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube that secures and protects ends of ladders and lift cords and has plastic- or metal-capped ends. 1. Type: Manufacturer's standard . E. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard braided cord. F. Ladders: Evenly spaced across headrail at spacing that prevents long-term slat sag. 1. Type: Braided cord . G. Valance: Manufacturer's standard . H. Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1. Type: Overhead . 2. Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind. I. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard. J. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: 1. Slats: White. 2. Components: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and materials exposed to view matching or coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated . ---PAGE BREAK--- HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\122113_fl.doc 122113 - 4 2.3 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1 including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch. C. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. D. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket positions and blind placement indicated. E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. F. Color-Coated Finish: 1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. ---PAGE BREAK--- HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\122113_fl.doc 122113 - 5 1. Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 1 inch from interior faces of glass and not closer than 1/2 inch from interior faces of glazing frames through full operating ranges of blinds. 2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails. 3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and furnishings. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating ranges. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer and that ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect before time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems. END OF SECTION 122113 ---PAGE BREAK--- PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\224000_fl.doc SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components: 1. Faucets for sink. 2. Stainless steel sinks. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities. B. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated. C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic. D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public ---PAGE BREAK--- PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\224000_fl.doc Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures. D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3. G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for sink faucets: 1. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 2. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 3. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 4. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 5. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 6. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings: 1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 2. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 3. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 4. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed. 2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed. ---PAGE BREAK--- PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 3 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\224000_fl.doc PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINK FAUCETS A. Sink Faucets: SK-1. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Elkay LK800GN08T4, or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Kohler Co.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. 4. Description: Dual lever faucet with separate gooseneck spout. Include hot- and cold- water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. a. Body Material: General-duty, solid brass . b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. c. Maximum Flow Rate: 1.5 gpm (5.68 L/min.), provide and install insert. d. Mixing Valve: ]Two-lever handle. e. Centers: 4 inches (102 mm. f. Mounting: Deck. g. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches (102 mm). h. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 (DN 10) tubing with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) female adapter. i. Spout Type: Rigid gooseneck j. Spout Outlet: Aerator. k. Vacuum Breaker: Not required. l. Operation: Noncompression, manual. m. Drain: Not required PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation. B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ---PAGE BREAK--- PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 4 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\224000_fl.doc 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. C. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system. D. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." E. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: ---PAGE BREAK--- PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 5 H:\2012\12537\3-Project-Dev\Specs\4-Final\224000_fl.doc 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities. END OF SECTION 224000 ---PAGE BREAK--- BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260010 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260010.DOC SECTION 260010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to all Division 26 Sections. B. Intent is to provide and install complete electrical systems, as required to accommodate the renovations to the existing Building. C. Access Panels: Where required by NFPA 70 D. All Cable Bundles Shall Be Limited to a Maximum of 12 Cables, Individual Bundles of Cables Shall Be Separated by at Least 2 Inches in All Directions. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Examine all contract documents for requirements affecting the work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. As used in this section, "provide" shall mean, "furnish and install". "Furnish" shall mean "to purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary appurtenance and support", and "Install" shall mean "to unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the project". 1.4 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner will provide all data cabling, terminations and testing, including providing jacks and outlets. 1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Division 01 for Substitutions and Product Options. 1.6 ALLOWANCES A. None. 1.7 ALTERNATES A. None. 1.8 REFERENCES A. NEMA Standards. ---PAGE BREAK--- BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260010 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260010.DOC B. NECA "Standard of Installation." C. NFPA 70 latest edition. D. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. E. U.L. Standards. F. ANSI Standards. G. Maine Uniform Building and Energy Codes (MUBEC) which include provisions of: 1. (IBC) International Building Code. 2. (IEBC) International Existing Building Code. 3. (IRC) International Residential Code. 4. (IECC) International Energy Conservation Code. 5. ASHRAE 62.1 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. 6. ASHRAE 62.2 Ventilation and Acceptable Indoor Air Quality in Low-Rise Residential Buildings. 7. ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. 8. ASTM E1465-06 Radon Standard for new residential construction - (Maine Model Standard). 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, Owner's Manuals, and Operating Instructions in accordance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures”. B. Include products specified in Division 26 individual sections. C. Submit Shop Drawings and product data grouped by individual Sections to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories. Label each with Section number and title. Partial Section submittals will not be reviewed. D. Include access panels. E. Include fire-stop seals and fillers. 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination”. B. Keep a marked set of Drawings at the site as a record set indicating all revisions in the work as the work progresses. At the completion of the work, mark the Drawings "As-Built Drawings" with the Contractor's name and date, and deliver to the Architect. 1.11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of the latest edition of ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code B. Conform to requirements of all local, State and Federal laws and regulations, plus local electric utility company's rules, and the Fire Underwriters' requirements. ---PAGE BREAK--- BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260010 - 3 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260010.DOC C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. D. Secure and pay for all permits and certificates as required by local, State and Federal laws. E. Request inspections from authority having jurisdiction. F. Run separate circuits for lighting and receptacle outlets as indicated. 1. Circuits shall be balanced and loads and capacities shall be in accordance with requirements of local electric light company and National Board of Fire Underwriters. 2. Do not share neutral on branch circuits. G. The entire electrical system shall be permanently and effectively grounded in accordance with Code requirements. H. The Drawings indicate only diagrammatically the extent, layout and the general location and arrangement of equipment, conduit and wiring. Become familiar with all details of the work and verify all dimensions in the field so that the outlets and equipment will be properly located and readily accessible. 1. Note that drawings do not show all junction boxes and fixture whips for lighting fixtures recessed in accessible ceilings. Although not specifically shown on the drawings, these fixtures shall be wired from junction boxes and 6'-0" unsupported whips. Provide number of junction boxes as required to allow for the 6'-0" whips. Wiring from fixture to fixture is not allowed. See Division 26 Section “Luminaires”. 2. Lighting and Devices shown with same panel and circuit designation with no home run symbol may share same home runs to panelboards provided that the furthest device on the circuit does not exceed 2-1/2% voltage drop. 3. Where home run symbols are shown, use separate run to panelboard for each symbol, and do not share home run with other devices having same panel and circuit designation. 1.12 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Coordinate with all other trades to ensure proper access and space requirements. B. Where project conditions occur necessitating departures from the drawings, submit for approval the details of and reasons for departures prior to implementing any change. C. Alterations 1. Visit the site and become familiar with the existing conditions, and the requirements of the Plans and Specifications. No claim will be recognized for extra compensation due to failure of becoming familiar with the conditions and extent of the proposed work. 2. Execute all alterations, additions, removals, relocations, or new work, etc., as indicated or required to provide a complete installation in accordance with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. 3. Repair or replace to the Owner's satisfaction, all existing work disturbed or damaged by the alterations. 4. Except as indicated below, retain ownership and remove from site all existing materials, equipment, fixtures, wiring and devices disconnected and not reused; Pay all charges for proper disposal of materials: a. Materials specifically indicated to be returned to Owner. 1) Obtain receipt of delivery from Owner's Representative. 5. Do not reuse existing wiring except as specifically indicated. Existing conduit raceways ---PAGE BREAK--- BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260010 - 4 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260010.DOC may be reused, provided that the existing wires are removed and new wires are installed. 6. Provide finished blank plates on all existing ceiling and wall boxes which can not be removed. 7. Ensure all circuits in existing buildings are re-energized where existing panelboards are replaced, or existing wiring is rerouted, disconnected, or disturbed. Provide and install new wiring as required to meet this condition. Verify breaker/fuse sizes on existing circuits and do not load wiring to beyond 75% of their ampacities. 1.13 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 01 Section “Summary”. B. Schedule and coordinate all work with Division 02, “Selective Structure Demolition and Alterations”. Schedule and coordinate all work with Division 33. Demolition and removal of electrical items are included as part of Division 26. Patching of existing structure left by removals is specified under Division 02. C. Arrange to execute the work at such times and in such locations as may be required to provide uninterrupted services for the occupied sections of the building or any of its sections. If necessary, install temporary work to provide for this condition. Authorization for interrupting services shall be obtained, in writing, from the Owner. Costs for overtime work and temporary work shall be included in the bid. 1.14 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. Make arrangements to provide temporary power. Coordinate with Owner to extend temporary services from the existing building. Temporary Power shall be maintained through to substantial completion of project. Include power used for temporary trailers, tools, charging tools and powered lifts, testing and start-up of equipment. B. Furnish all temporary equipment, wiring, lamps, etc., as required for the completion of the work, including the work of all Subcontractors. C. Temporary electrical work shall comply with OSHA and NEC requirements. D. Lighting level in all areas for the duration of construction period shall be a minimum of 5 foot candles or per OSHA requirements, whichever is greater. Provide a minimum of 50 foot candles for taping and painting of all surfaces, and for surfaces receiving finishes, including flooring and tile. When permanent light fixtures are installed, these units may be used to provide required lighting level, but shall be re-lamped with correct lamps prior to building turnover to Owner." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINTING A. Refer to Division 09 for painting. 2.2 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panels required for items furnished under Division 26 shall be provided under this Division and installed under Divisions 08 and 09. ---PAGE BREAK--- BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260010 - 5 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260010.DOC B. Standard panels: 12" x 16" except as indicated. Doors: flush type 14-gauge steel, hinged to 16- gauge frame. Latch: Flush face screw or key operated. All factory primed and painted to match in the field. 1. Same U.L. fire rating as wall, floor, or ceiling in which they are installed. 2. Equal To: Inryco/Milcor style and Miami-Carey "HM". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION A. Execute all work in a neat manner acceptable to the Local and State Electrical Inspector. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations. B. All electrical components and their attachments shall be properly supported and where required shall be designed for seismic forces. C. Lighting fixtures shall be supported from structural steel. Provide unistrut channels or equal to span between top cord of joists. See Division 26 “Luminaires”. D. Perform all electrical work by licensed electricians well skilled in the trade and supervised by a Master Electrician. E. Replace or repair to new condition, defective equipment and equipment damaged during installation or testing. F. Position isolated electrical equipment so that it is free standing and does not come in rigid contact with the building structure or other systems. 3.2 TESTING AND ADJUSTING A. The entire installation shall be free from short circuits and improper grounds. Test in the presence of the Architects or their representatives. B. Test feeders with the feeders disconnected from the branch circuit panels. C. Test each individual branch circuit at the panel. In testing for insulation resistance to ground, the power equipment shall be connected for proper operation. In no case shall the insulation resistance be less than that required by the National Electrical Code and the manufacturer's recommendations. Correct failure in a manner satisfactory to the Architect and Engineers. D. Completely test and adjust each system specified under Division 26 for proper operation. 3.3 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND OPENINGS A. Sleeves: 1. Furnish and install all sleeves required for the work. 2. Sleeves through exterior building walls or through concrete construction shall be rigid galvanized steel. 3. Sleeves shall be sized to provide a total of not less than 1/2-inch clearance around conduit. 4. Sleeves for setting into walls shall be flush with finished construction. Sleeves for setting into floor shall be embedded in concrete slab and extend approximately 2 inches above ---PAGE BREAK--- BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260010 - 6 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260010.DOC finished floors. 5. All sleeved openings within building shall be sealed airtight using fire barrier caulking with a UL classification for use as a fire penetration seal for walls and floors with up to a 3-hour fire rating expanded. 6. Sleeves shall be provided in all locations where cables and conduits penetrate walls and floors. 7. Selection of firestopping materials and installation shall be as required to maintain the fire resistive rating of the existing construction or as specifically indicated. END OF SECTION 260010 ---PAGE BREAK--- CONDUIT 260111 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260111.DOC SECTION 260111 – CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES A. Metal Conduit. B. Flexible Metal Conduit. C. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures”. B. Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Requirements”. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA "Standard of Installation." B. NEMA Standards. C. NFPA 70 N.E.C. latest edition. D. U.L. Standards. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70 for conductors indicated. Increase size as required to include bonding conductors specified. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, Owner's Manuals, and Operating Instructions in accordance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures”. B. Include expansion fittings for all conduit types used on the project. C. Include fire-stop seals and fillers. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ---PAGE BREAK--- CONDUIT 260111 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260111.DOC A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination”. B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Division 01. B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to meet project conditions. D. Where conduit routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Except as otherwise specifically noted, all wiring throughout the building, including each of the systems specified, shall be enclosed in minimum size 3/4 inch conduit. B. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid galvanized steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit. C. Interior Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid galvanized steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit. D. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use rigid galvanized steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing. 2. Concealed/ Accessible: Use rigid galvanized steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing. 3. Exposed: Use rigid galvanized steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing. a. Exposed conduit: Not allowed in finished areas except as specifically noted. b. Finished areas: Exposed raceways specified under Division 26 Section “Surface Raceways”. E. Panel Feeders: Use rigid galvanized steel, electrical metallic tubing in accordance with locations herein specified. ---PAGE BREAK--- CONDUIT 260111 - 3 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260111.DOC F. Couplings and connectors for electrical metallic tubing up to 2" shall be steel set screw or compression type. Set-screw connection shall be used for all tubing sizes with a minimum of four set-screws for coupling and two set-screws for connectors and fittings for sizes 1-1/4" and larger. G. Couplings and connectors for rigid and intermediate metal conduit shall be threaded. H. Termination for all conduit and tubing shall have insulated bushings or insulated throat connectors in accordance with code requirements. I. Permanent Connection to Motors: Dry locations, use flexible metal conduit. Damp or wet locations, use flexible liquidtight Type UA conduit with approved liquidtight fittings. Maximum length two feet PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. In general, all raceways shall be concealed above ceilings and within finished walls - securely supported in accordance with code requirements. Wiring in areas with no finished ceilings (exposed construction) shall be exposed overhead such that all raceways are parallel or perpendicular to joists, columns or beams and all drops to wall devices shall be concealed in walls. B. Install exposed only where specifically indicated. C. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." D. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. E. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. F. Group Related Conduits: 1. Support using conduit rack of Power-Strut, or approved equal. 2. Parallel runs shall be neatly clustered with all bends and offsets of uniform pattern 3. Provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduit. G. Substantially support with approved clips or hangers spaced not to exceed ten feet (10') on centers except 1/2" rigid conduit and 1/2" and 3/4" electrical metallic tubing shall have supports spaced not to exceed six feet H. Fasten conduit supports to building structure. 1. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. 2. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. 3. Conduits larger than 2” shall be supported from top cord of joists. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. ---PAGE BREAK--- CONDUIT 260111 - 4 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260111.DOC K. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. 1. Install only where specifically indicated or required. 2. Obtain approval from the Architect before installation. L. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. M. Maintain 6 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104ºF. N. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. O. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction. Use factory elbows or hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit 2 inches or larger in size. P. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. Q. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic, control and expansion joints. R. Provide suitable labeled nylon pull string in each empty conduit. S. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. T. Use sleeves when passing through floors and walls. U. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding.” V. Identify conduit under provisions of Division 26 Section “Electrical Identification.” 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. No wire shall be installed until work which might cause damage to wires or conduits has been completed. B. Conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned of water or other foreign matter before wire is installed. 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire-resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using approved seals, fillers and materials. END OF SECTION 260111 ---PAGE BREAK--- SURFACE RACEWAYS 260112 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260112.DOC SECTION 260112 - SURFACE RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES A. Surface Metal Raceways. B. Multi-outlet Assemblies. C. Wireways. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Division 26 Section 260100 “Basic Electrical Requirements”. B. Division 26 Section 260111 “Conduit”. C. Division 26 Section 260141 “Wiring Devices.” D. Division 26 Section 260170 “Grounding and Bonding.” 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA Standards. B. NFPA 70 N.E.C. latest edition. C. U.L. Standards. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Size per N.E.C. and manufacturer's recommendations. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, Owner's Manuals, and Operating Instructions in accordance with Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." B. Include product data for surface metal raceways, multi-outlet assemblies, wireways, and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS ---PAGE BREAK--- SURFACE RACEWAYS 260112 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260112.DOC A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Wiremold Series: 200, 500, 700r all] 2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016300. B. Description: U.L. approved assembly comprising a metal base and cover to form a raceway designed for surface mounting. Cover removable to allow installation of wires after the base channel is installed. C. Finish: Ivory enamel. Paint to match surroundings when installed on wall surface. D. Fittings, Boxes and Extension Rings, Couplings, Elbows, and Connectors: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories for a complete installation. 2.2 WIREWAYS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Square D. 3. Siemen. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01 Section “Substitutions and Product Options. B. Description: U.L. approved narrow sheet metal enclosure, rectangular in cross section, hinged or removable cover for housing and protecting electric wires and cable and in which conductors are laid in place after the wireway has been installed as a complete system. C. General purpose except as indicated. Raintight where installed outside or in damp locations , with knockouts only as required. D. Size: As required by NEC Article 376 for the number and size wires indicated. Minimum 4 x 4 inches. E. Cover: Hinged or screw type with built-in protection for conductors. F. Fittings, Couplings, Elbows, Offsets, End Caps and Connectors: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories for a complete installation. Fittings shall have removable front covers for installation of wires. G. Code gauge, enameled steel with rust inhibiting primer coat. Gray enamel finish except as noted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Exposed wiring shall not be installed in finished areas except as specifically indicated. Where existing conditions require building wiring to be exposed, use surface metal raceways. Obtain approval from the Architect prior to installing surface wiring. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. ---PAGE BREAK--- SURFACE RACEWAYS 260112 - 3 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260112.DOC D. Maintain grounding continuity between raceway components to provide a continuous grounding path. Ground and bond under provisions of Division 26 Section 260170 “Grounding and Bonding”. E. Support wireways as approved with supports located at every splice and fitting and at intervals not to exceed five feet. END OF SECTION 260112 ---PAGE BREAK--- CABLE TRAYS 260114 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260114.DOC SECTION 260114 - CABLE TRAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cable Trays. B. Cable Tray Accessories. C. Complete System, Including All Fittings, Mounting Hardware and Accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26 Section 260100 “Basic Electrical Requirements.” 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA Standards. B. NEMA VE 1 - Cable Tray Systems. C. NEMA Standards. D. NFPA 70 Latest Edition. E. U.L. Standards. F. ANSI Standards. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 B. Submit Shop Drawings, Owner's Manuals, and Operating Instructions in accordance with Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures". C. U.L. classified as equipment grounding conductors. D. Length as indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, Owner's Manuals, and Operating Instructions in accordance with Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures". B. Include floor plans showing layout and connections and all components. C. Submit manufacturers' instructions. D. Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes. ---PAGE BREAK--- CABLE TRAYS 260114 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260114.DOC 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations and mounting heights if not as shown on Drawings. B. Accurately record actual routing. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and required. B. Routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route as required to meet Project Conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Cooper. B. B-Line Systems. C. Square D. D. Husky E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01 Section "Substitutions and Product Options". 2.2 CABLE TRAYS: As specified on Drawings A. Tray: NEMA VE 1. B. Inside Radii of Fittings: 12 inches. C. Splice plates: Bolted type, using either square neck or ribbed-neck carriage bolts and serrated flange lock nuts. The cable tray shall be designed so that a splice plate located anywhere along the span shall not decrease the strength of the cable tray system. D. In addition to the full uniformly distributed cable load, the cable tray shall support 200 lbs concentrated load at mid-point (middle of span) without permanent distortion to cable tray. Loads specified are applicable to both the side rails and rung capacities. E. Accessories and Fittings: Manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps. 2.3 SOLID-BOTTOM-TYPE CABLE TRAYS A. Material and Finish of Tray, Fittings, and Accessories: Steel, hot-dipped galvanized or aluminum. B. Solid bottom, one piece construction with a flat bottom. ---PAGE BREAK--- CABLE TRAYS 260114 - 3 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260114.DOC C. Covers: None. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation: In conformance with NEMA VE 1 requirements and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Support cable tray at each connection point, at the end of each run, and at other points per manufacturer's recommendations. Support points shall not exceed C. Use expansion connectors where indicated in NEMA VE 1. D. Cut standard straight sections to length in field. E. Provide bonding continuity between cable tray sections and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. All wiring within cable tray shall be approved for the purpose. G. When passing through fire rated walls, install fittings as required to maintain the fire rating. H. Cable Trays Shall Be Used Solely For: Owner's use. I. At all corners along indicated path of cable tray, provide continuous curved tray as required for continuous cable support. In all instances provide hardware as required for proper support of the cable tray. END OF SECTION 260114 ---PAGE BREAK--- WIRE AND CABLE 260123 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260123.DOC SECTION 260123 - WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building wire and cable. B. Metal clad cable. C. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26 Section 260100 “Basic Electrical Requirements.” B. Division 26 Section 260111 “Conduit.” C. Division 26 Section 260112 “Surface Raceways.” D. Division 26 Section 260130 “Boxes.” E. Division 26 Section 260195 “Electrical Identification.” 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA Standards. B. NFPA 70 N.E.C. Latest Edition. C. U.L. Standards. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Conductor Sizes Shown Are Based on Copper. D. Manufacturer's name, wire size and insulation type shall be clearly marked on the insulation or jacket. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, Owner's Manuals, and Operating Instructions in accordance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.” B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. ---PAGE BREAK--- WIRE AND CABLE 260123 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260123.DOC C. Include MC manufacturer’s specification sheets indicating construction, diameter, ampacity and bending radius. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. B. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination or circuit number only is indicated, determine exact routing and required. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Locate such that outlets are readily accessible. B. Determine required separation between cable and other work. C. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General Cable. B. Triangle PWC, Inc. C. Superior Essex Inc. D. Southwire Company. E. Allied Wire & Cable. F. Cerro Wire. G. AFC Cable Systems. H. Encore Wire Corporation. I. United Copper Industries. 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. C. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70 Type THHN/THWN, XHHW rated 90 degrees C. 2.3 METAL CLAD CABLE A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70 Type MC with separate insulated ground. ---PAGE BREAK--- WIRE AND CABLE 260123 - 3 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260123.DOC B. Conductor: Copper, maximum # 10 AWG. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90ºC. E. Armor Material: Steel or Aluminum. F. Armor Design: Interlocked Metal Armor G. Jacket: None. 2.4 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Use the Following Types As Herein Specified: 1. Split bolt connectors. 2. Solderless pressure connectors. 3. Spring wire connectors. 4. Compression connectors. 5. Insulation piercing connectors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 WIRING METHODS A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only wire Type THHN/THWN, XHHW insulation, in raceway or metal clad cable. B. Accessible Dry Interior Locations (such as above acoustical ceilings): Use only wire Type THHN/THWN, XHHW insulation, in raceway or metal clad cable. C. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: 1. Use exposed wiring only where specifically indicated. 2. Use only building wire Type THHN/THWN, XHHW insulation, in raceway. D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire Type THHN/THWN, XHHW, XHHW-2 insulation, in raceway. E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire Type THHN/THWN, XHHW, XHHW-2 insulation, in raceway. ---PAGE BREAK--- WIRE AND CABLE 260123 - 4 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260123.DOC F. Panel Feeders: Use only building wire Type THHN/THWN, XHHW and XHHW-2 insulation, in raceway. G. Use other wiring methods only as specifically indicated on Drawings. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Except as otherwise specifically noted, all wiring throughout the building, including each of the systems specified, shall be enclosed in raceways. C. In general, all wire in raceways and cable shall be concealed above ceilings and within finished walls, securely supported in accordance with code requirements. Wiring in areas with no finished ceilings (exposed construction) shall be raceways exposed overhead, but run along structures such that raceways have minimum visibility and such that all raceways are parallel or perpendicular to joists, columns or beams and concealed in walls. D. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits #10 AWG and smaller. At contractors option stranded conductors for #10 AWG and smaller shall be permitted as long as vinyl insulated support crimp-on fork terminals are use for all screw head terminations. Barrel lugs and screw activated compression clamps on back wired devices shall not require crimp-on terminals. E. Use stranded conductor for feeders and branch circuits #8 AWG and larger. F. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. G. Minimum Size Conductors for Power and Lighting Circuits #12 AWG Except as Follows: 1. Minimum #10 AWG for 120 volt circuits more than 100 feet long. 2. Minimum #10 AWG for 277 volt circuits more than 230 feet long. 3. Sizes shall be not less than indicated. 4. Note: Wire sizes indicated on drawings and schedules are minimum requirements and shall be adjusted to meet the above criteria. H. Use conductor not smaller than #14 AWG for control circuits with fusing sized accordingly. I. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. J. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire #4 AWG and larger. K. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or approved cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not support from ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. Do not drape over ductwork or between bar joists. Wiring shall not be run diagonally and shall be cabled neatly. L. Use approved cable fittings and connectors. M. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, [cable trays,] and panelboards. N. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. O. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible ---PAGE BREAK--- WIRE AND CABLE 260123 - 5 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260123.DOC temperature rise. P. Use Polaris insulated connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, #6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. Q. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, #8 AWG and smaller. R. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. S. Wiring in sleeves passing through fire-rated barriers shall be sealed/filled with approved material to maintain the fire rating. 3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Division 26 Section 260195 “Electrical Identification”. B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. B. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values. C. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor. D. Verify proper operation of each circuit. 3.7 TESTING A. For conductors larger than #8AWG, perform Insulation-Resistance Test on each field-installed conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. 1. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. 2. Take readings after 1 minute and until the reading is constant for 15 seconds. 3. Minimum insulation-resistance values shall not be less than 25 Megohms for 300 volt rated cable and 100 Megohms for 600 volt rated cable. END OF SECTION 260123 ---PAGE BREAK--- BOXES 260130 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260130.DOC SECTION 260130 - BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and Ceiling Outlet Boxes. B. Pull and Junction Boxes. C. Terminal Blocks and Accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26 Section 260100 “Basic Electrical Requirements.” B. Division 26 Section 260111 “Conduit.” C. Division 26 Section 260141 “Wiring Devices.” D. Division 26 Section 260170 “Grounding and Bonding.” E. Division 26 Section 260180 “Equipment Wiring.” 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA Standards. B. NFPA 70 N.E.C. Latest Edition. C. U.L. Standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, Owner's Manuals, and Operating Instructions in accordance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures”. B. Include product data for boxes larger than 12x12x6 inches, and boxes with hinged covers. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” B. Accurately record actual locations and mounting heights of outlets if not as shown on Drawings, plus pull and junction boxes larger than 12x12x6 inches and boxes used for panel feeders. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose ---PAGE BREAK--- BOXES 260130 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260130.DOC specified and shown. C. Size per N.E.C. Art. 314. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify locations of wall boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in. C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose. D. Generally pull boxes are not shown on Drawings. Provide as required. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Locate such that outlets are readily accessible and does not interference with other work. B. Provide for access panel where required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: Standard type galvanized steel, minimum four inch square or octagon by 2-1/8 inch deep. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type, three and four inch deep or depth as to coordinate with concrete slab. 3. Single Wall Type: Minimum size, four inch square by 1-1/2 inch deep, except as noted. Provide dry wall plaster rings raised as required to insure flush finish mounting. 4. Ganged Wall Type: Minimum depth 3 inches except as noted, ganged as required under common plate to contain device shown. B. Cast Boxes: Type FS shallow or type FD deep, aluminum or cast feralloy. 1. Provide number of threaded hubs as required. 2. Use in all exterior, damp or exposed in mechanical space. 3. Provide gasketed cover and accessories by box manufacturer for complete weatherproofing. 2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: Standard type galvanized steel, minimum four inch square or octagon by 2-1/8 inch deep. 1. Sizes up to 12x12x6 inch: Provide screw-type or hinged covers. 2. Sizes greater than 12x12x6 inch: Provide hinged covers. B. Exterior Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box. ---PAGE BREAK--- BOXES 260130 - 3 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260130.DOC 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron or Cast aluminum. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. 1. Except where specifically noted, boxes on finished surfaces shall be flush mounted with finished cover plate. 2. Consult Architect prior to installing in finished areas. B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance. C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. D. In Non-accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes [no more than [6][12] inches] from ceiling access panels or from removable recessed luminaires such that they are accessible. E. In accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes such that they are accessible from ceiling access panels or from removable recessed luminaires. F. Install boxes to preserve fire-resistance rating of partitions and other elements. G. Align Wall Boxes for Switches, Receptacles, Thermostats, Telephone, and Similar Devices with Each Other as Follows: 1. Horizontally for outlets with same mounting height. 2. Vertically for outlets shown in similar locations with different mounting heights. H. Do not install flush mounted boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inch separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic and fire rated walls. I. Accurately position flush mounted wall boxes to allow for surface finish thickness. 1. Box shall be flush with finished surface. 2. Use wall box support brackets that span two studs. 3. Single stud support will be allowed only if used with Caddy H series E-Z Mount Brackets or equal product to support side opposite the stud. J. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation and vapor barrier or reducing its effectiveness. K. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. M. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box. N. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. ---PAGE BREAK--- BOXES 260130 - 4 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260130.DOC O. Use 4" square box with plaster ring for single device outlets. P. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. Q. Large Pull Boxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches in volume or 12 inches in any dimension. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged covers. 2. Other Locations: Use surface-mounted cast metal box. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches and B. Position outlet boxes to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plan. END OF SECTION 260130 ---PAGE BREAK--- WIRING DEVICES 260141 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260141.DOC SECTION 260141 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall Switches. B. Wall Dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Device Plates. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 260010 “Basic Electrical Requirements.” B. Division 26 Section 260130 “Boxes.” 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA Standards. B. NFPA 70 N.E.C. Latest Edition. C. U.L. Standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings for equipment and component devices in accordance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures”. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. C. Include documentation showing compliance with UL, Fed. Spec. and NEMA references. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: ---PAGE BREAK--- WIRING DEVICES 260141 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260141.DOC 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). 2. Hubbell; HBL5361 (single), CR5352 (duplex). 3. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). 4. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex) B. Device Body: 1. Wall mounted devices shall be Black. 2. Ceiling mounted devices shall be white. 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: Straight blade, feed -through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. Will not energize if line and load wiring are reversed. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A, black: 1. Cooper; GF20. 2. Hubbell; GFR5352 3. Pass & Seymour; 2095 2.4 WALL SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). 2. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). 3. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). 4. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way) C. Provide key switches, three-way, four-way switches, etc., as indicated matching the Series listed above. For keyed switches, provide minimum 2 keys per keyed device. D. Device Body: Toggle handle type, color: Black. 2.5 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: Series 97000 stainless steel USD-32 with satin finish. B. Rain-Tight While-in-use Cover Plates: NEMA 3R Clear cover extra deep, Leviton 5966-DCL Series. ---PAGE BREAK--- WIRING DEVICES 260141 - 3 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260141.DOC C. Utility Area Cover Plates for Surface Mounting: Cadmium plated steel with rounded edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install devices and plates vertical and plumb. Boxes shall be flush with finished surface. C. Provide matching blank face plate for all unused wall boxes. D. Install switches with Off position down. 1. Locate close to door frame on latch side of door, or beyond swing of door where appropriate. 2. Where door frames have side lights, switch shall be either located below side light where a 3'-0" mounting height is possible, or beyond the side light. Coordinate with door frame schedule. 3. Switches indicated in the same area at the same mounting heights shall be ganged together under a common plate. E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. END OF SECTION 260141 ---PAGE BREAK--- GROUNDING AND BONDING 260170 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260170.DOC SECTION 260170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Equipment grounding conductors. B. Bonding. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26 Section 260100 “Basic Electrical Requirements.” 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA Standards. B. NFPA 70 Latest Edition. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, Owner's Manuals, and Operating Instructions in accordance with Division 01 Section ”Submittal Procedures”. B. Product Data: Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination”. B. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE A. Material: Copper. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ---PAGE BREAK--- GROUNDING AND BONDING 260170 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260170.DOC B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, 600 volt insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. C. Provide and install bonding conductor to each item of electrical equipment. D. Bonding conductors shall be continuous where possible. Where splices are required, provide T & B, or approved equal, compression connectors of approved pattern. Insulate connectors to equivalent thickness of conductors. END OF SECTION 260170 ---PAGE BREAK--- EQUIPMENT WIRING 260180 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260180.DOC SECTION 260180 - EQUIPMENT WIRING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections or furnished by Owner. B. All line voltage wiring including final branch circuit connections to disconnects, motor controllers, and motors. C. Fused and non-fused disconnect switches for the equipment, except disconnect switches specifically provided with the equipment. D. Except as specifically noted, all motors and variable frequency drives, plus magnetic or manual starters and thermal overload protection for motors operating at 250 volt or less, will be furnished with the equipment for installation under Division 26 Section 260180. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01 Section "Summary". B. Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements". 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA Standards. B. NFPA 70 Latest Edition. C. U.L. Standards. D. ANSI Standards. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Drawings do not show all required disconnect servicing switches. Furnish and locate as required by N.E.C. D. Size fuses and thermal elements per N.E.C. and manufacturer's recommendations. E. Connect motors for correct voltage, phase and rotation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, Owner's Manuals, and Operating Instructions in accordance with Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures". ---PAGE BREAK--- EQUIPMENT WIRING 260180 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260180.DOC B. Include disconnect devices, wiring connections and special outlets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES: 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler Hammer. B. I-T-E Siemens. C. General Electric. D. Square D. 2.3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Enclosed, heavy-duty type, except as noted with visible blades, Horsepower rated 600-volt and 250-volt ratings as required by the particular circuit. B. NEMA-1 enclosure, for dry locations; NEMA-3R raintight for exterior locations. C. Fuses and ampere rating and number of poles as indicated on Drawings, or as required by the specific equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough-in. Verify location, size, and type of connections. Coordinate details of equipment connections with supplier and installer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat-producing equipment, but in no case less than the wire specified under Division 26 Section 260123 “Wire and Cable.” B. Conduit Connections to Equipment: Dry locations, use flexible conduit. Damp or wet locations, use flexible liquidtight Type UA conduit with approved liquidtight fittings. Maximum length two feet C. Install pre-finished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or specified, or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps. ---PAGE BREAK--- EQUIPMENT WIRING 260180 - 3 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260180.DOC D. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. E. Make wiring connections in wiring compartment of prewired equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, temperature switches as indicated or required. END OF SECTION 260180 ---PAGE BREAK--- ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260195 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260195.DOC SECTION 260195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES A. Nameplates and Tape Labels. B. Wire and Cable Markers. C. Conductor Color Coding. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 09 for “Painting”. B. Division 26 Section 260010 “Basic Electrical Requirements.” 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 Latest Edition. 1.4 REQUIREMENTS A. Label all existing panelboards, all safety switches, controls, relays, junction boxes, pull boxes, pilot lights, special switches and outlets. Label on panelboards shall include name and circuit number of source. B. Nameplates shall identify function of device, space controlled, voltage conditions, fuse size, panel serving switch, as indicated or required without abbreviations. Details shall be as approved. C. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. Art. 200 for grounded neutral conductor, Art. 210 for branch circuits and art. 250 for grounding (bonding) conductor. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, in accordance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures”. B. Only include if details of nameplates, wiring markers and conductor color code are not as specified below. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on a black background. B. Junction Box Labels: Hand lettered with indelible black marker. Indicate voltage and circuit. ---PAGE BREAK--- ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260195 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260195.DOC C. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type. D. Fire Alarm Junction Boxes: Paint red. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, or rivets, or adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. Secure nameplate to outside face of surface panelboards in unfinished locations. 3.2 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Conductors throughout the building shall be color coded to identify voltage and phases. 1. All metallic bonding conductors - Green. 2. Phase Conductors of 120/208 Volt System: Black, red, blue. Neutral: white. B. All circuit conductors of the same color shall be connected to the same ungrounded feeder conductor throughout the installation. C. Where Conductors Are Not Available in the Colors Indicated, Due to Size, Prewired Cable, or Other Reason: Install identifying adhesive bands 3/4" wide of colors indicated above around each conductor within six inches and twelve inches (12") of each end and at a maximum of five foot intervals along wireways, at back of panelboards, and wherever conductors are accessible. D. Power and Lighting Circuits in Panelboard Gutters, Pull Boxes, [Outlet and Junction Boxes,] and at Load Connection: Provide wire markers on each conductor and Identify with branch circuit or feeder number. E. System Control Wires at Control Panel and Load Connection: 1. Provide wire markers on each conductor and identify with number as indicated on manufacturer's schematic and interconnection diagrams. 2. Fire Alarm System: Follow local Fire Department color code and labeling standards. END OF SECTION 260195 ---PAGE BREAK--- LUMINAIRES 260510 - 1 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260510.DOC SECTION 260510 – LUMINAIRES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior and exterior luminaires and accessories. B. Ballasts. C. Lamps. D. Additional wiring methods for luminaires. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26 Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements. B. Division 26 Section 260111: Conduit. C. Division 26 Section 260123: Wire and Cable. D. Division 26 Section 260130: Boxes. E. Division 26 Section 260170: Grounding and Bonding. F. Division 26 Section 260141: Wiring Devices. (for self contained local controls) 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA Standards. B. NFPA 70 N.E.C. Latest Edition. C. U.L. Standards. D. ANSI/NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, Owner's Manuals, and Operating Instructions in accordance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures”. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. ---PAGE BREAK--- LUMINAIRES 260510 - 2 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260510.DOC C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, performance data and total input watts. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site. Inspect for damage. B. Protect from moisture, corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. 1.7 SPARES A. Provide replacement lamps for each lamp type installed as follows: 1. 10% where 1000 or more lamps of one type are installed. 2. 20% where less than 1000 lamps of one type are installed up to a maximum of 100 lamps per type. 3. Minimum of 2 lamps for each type. B. Provide replacement ballasts for each ballast type installed as follows: 1. 1% of total ballasts per type installed. 2. Minimum of 2 ballasts for each type installed. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Wiring to fixtures as shown on Drawings is diagrammatic only and is intended to show circuit and switching arrangements. Fixtures shall not be used as raceways except as specifically allowed by N.E.C. Art 410. B. Where panel designation and circuit numbers are shown with no homerun symbol, wiring to same circuits may share same homerun to panel. See voltage drop and distance restrictions in Division 26 Section 260100. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES A. Furnish products as specified in schedule on Drawings. B. All fixtures shall be approved by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and bear Underwriters' labels. C. In addition to the manufacturers listed on the Drawings, fixtures with equivalent details and matching characteristics as provided by manufacturers listed below shall be considered for approval after review of Shop Drawings. D. Manufacturers: Halo Columbia Exceline Cooper Daybrite Delta Exceline Holophane Hubble ICE (ICON) Keene Benjamin Insight Lighting Keystone KIM Lightolier Litecontrol Lithonia Moldcast Peerless QL Spaulding SPI Winona ---PAGE BREAK--- LUMINAIRES 260510 - 3 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260510.DOC E. Ballast: Provide ballast suitable for lamp specified. F. Lamps: All lamps shall be furnished and installed in each fixture. 2.2 BALLASTS: Rated 120 volts or as noted. A. Ballast Manufacturers: 1. Valmont. 2. Osram/Sylvania. 3. Universal Lighting Technologies. 4. Magnetek. 5. Jefferson. 6. Advance. B. T8 and T5HO linear lamp Fluorescent Ballast: 1. Fully electronic 25,000 Hz programmed start, two, three and four lamp type. Quantities to allow switching as indicated on plans. Provide only rapid start lamps which are specifically designed to operate properly on instant start electronic ballasts. 2. Ballasts for all recessed fixtures shall be of the very low heat (VLH) design. 3. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 15%. 4. Ballast Factor Shall be Normal (minimum 0.88). 5. Where fixtures run end to end, or are within the standard 11 foot ballast whip distance, then efforts shall be made to utilize as many four lamp ballasts as possible (driving four lamps). In all cases, ballasts shall be installed to drive the exact number of lamps they are designed for, Example - one lamp ballast drives one lamp, two lamp ballast drives two lamps, etc. Installation where this criteria is not followed will not be accepted. 6. Where fixtures can use 11 foot whips (master and satellite pairs), ballast shall be installed to drive the exact number of lamps indicated and fixture shall be provided with pre- manufactured ballast whips. 7. Ballast shall be approved for use in “High Efficiency Schools” by the State of Maine. 2.3 LAMPS A. Lamp Manufacturers: 1. Sylvania/Osram. 2. Philips. 3. Venture Lighting International. 4. General Electric. B. Fluorescent Lamps: T8 (2900 lumen) as scheduled, Energy saving 3500K, 85 CRI, designed to operate properly when driven by ballasts indicated on the schedule and ballasts as specified herein. C. All Lamps shall be low mercury and non-hazardous, and shall pass the EPAs Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) for the purpose of disposal. D. Incandescent Lamps: Rated 130 volt. E. High Intensity Discharge Lamps: Supplied as indicated. F. Provide lamp types specified for luminaire. ---PAGE BREAK--- LUMINAIRES 260510 - 4 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260510.DOC G. For fluorescent lamps operated by a dimming ballast: Properly burn-in the lamp before installation in the fixture (burn in time shall be 100hours). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fixtures: Complete with 660 watt sockets, wiring, ballasts, stems, hangers, fittings, end plates, pendant feeds, aircraft cable, etc. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Suspended Luminaires. 1. Pendants: a. 1/2" rigid conduit stems, painted to match fixture, with swivel mounts. b. Where indicated provide aircraft cable suspension. Feed end shall have canopy with feed grommet and white coiled cord wrapped around cable. Stretch coil making 1" gaps. c. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. Cut or lengthened to give mounting heights as indicated and required. d. Where fixtures are specifically indicated to be chain mounted, provide wire hook chain set & jack chains cut to length as required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. Use MC cable supported by cable ties from fixture to junction box mounted in structure above each fixture. e. Except as specifically noted, fixtures shall be supported from structural steel. Provide unistrut channels or equal to span between top cord of joists. Supports shall be suitable for fixture weight and seismic forces. f. Pendant suspension details shall be submitted for approval prior to installation. D. Provide 12 gauge safety hanger wire supports for all fixtures recessed in ceiling grids of suspended acoustical ceilings. Hangers shall be independent of ceiling framing suspension system and shall extend from fixture housing to structure above. Lighting fixtures weighing less than 56 pounds shall have two hangers, at diagonal corners of fixture (2 locations). Lighting fixtures weighing more than 56 pounds shall have four hangers, one at each corner of fixture (4 locations). Wires shall have no tension (slack) to prevent ceiling distortion. In addition, attach to ceiling framing “T”s as required by code. E. Fixtures with one piece 8' channel shall be supported within two feet of each end and fixtures with 4' channel shall be supported within one foot of each end. Fixtures indicated in continuous rows shall have ends bolted together and shall be provided with 4' long lens constructed so the joint between two sections of an 8' fixture appear the same as two 4' fixtures butted together. F. Fixtures in sloping ceilings shall have angle face plate for proper orientation of fixture. G. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. Fixtures shall have frame and trim details to match the ceiling suspension system furnished. Coordinate details with Acoustical Treatment Section and installation with the Ceiling Installer to assure fixtures are centered on tiles or on joints as required. ---PAGE BREAK--- LUMINAIRES 260510 - 5 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260510.DOC H. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Install spacers where required to allow proper installation of rabbeted (Tegular) ceiling tiles. Secure to prevent movement. I. Install clips to secure recessed luminaires in place. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. J. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. K. Install wall mounted luminaires at height as indicated. L. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. M. Additional Wiring Methods For Luminaires: 1. Refer to Division 26 Section 260100 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Performance Requirements. 2. Refer to Division 26 Section 260123 - Wire and Cable: Wiring Methods. 3. Fluorescent Fixtures: Wiring within housings and between fixtures and junction boxes above ceilings shall be Type THHN insulated conductors rated for use at temperatures not lower than 90ºC. N. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. O. Install specified lamps in each luminaire. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Locate fixtures to avoid interference with mechanical and structural features. B. In finished spaces, consult the Architect prior to making adjustment to fixture locations. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. All fixtures and equipment shall be in first-class condition at time of delivery of building to Owners with all scratches, mars, etc., refinished to factory standards. B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.4 ADJUSTING/CLEANING/RELAMPING A. Aim and adjust luminaires after dark as directed. B. Relamp luminaires whose lamps have failed at Substantial Completion and six months thereafter. C. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. D. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. ---PAGE BREAK--- LUMINAIRES 260510 - 6 H:\2012\12537\3-PROJECT-DEV\SPECS\4-FINAL\260510.DOC E. Clean photometric control surfaces using procedures as recommended by manufacturer. F. Clean finishes and touch up damage. G. Where Existing Light Fixtures are Indicated to be Reused: Units shall be cleaned, relamped, reinstalled, and rewired. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Shown on Drawings. END OF SECTION 260510